swap experience between HUAWEI and Ericsson is very important
700
Parameter Name MAPPING STATUS Downlink Quality Threshold in Assigning Better Cell NO MAPPING REQUIRED Uplink Quality Threshold in Assigning Better Cell NO MAPPING REQUIRED Maximum Better Cell Assigning Duration NO MAPPING REQUIRED Abis ByPass Mode NO MAPPING REQUIRED SDCCH Congestion Flow Control Allowed NO MAPPING REQUIRED Abis Idle TS Allocate Strategy NO MAPPING REQUIRED Abis Idle TS Configure Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED TCHH Function Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED
Transcript
Parameter Name MAPPING STATUS GUI Value Range
Downlink Quality Threshold in Assigning Better Cell NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~70
Uplink Quality Threshold in Assigning Better Cell NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~70
Maximum Better Cell Assigning Duration NO MAPPING REQUIRED 10~80
Abis ByPass Mode NO MAPPING REQUIRED
SDCCH Congestion Flow Control Allowed NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(No), YES(Yes)
Abis Idle TS Allocate Strategy NO MAPPING REQUIRED
Abis Idle TS Configure Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED
TCHH Function Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(NO), YES(YES)
TRUE(Support), FALSE(Not Support)
IDLETSALLOC_0(Any idle timeslots under the
same site), IDLETSALLOC_1(Idle timeslots on same E1 primary link preferred), IDLETSALLOC_2(Idle timeslots on same E1
primary link only), IDLETSALLOC_3(Idle timeslots on same 64K
primary link only)
CLOSE(CLOSE), OPEN(OPEN)
Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot NO MAPPING REQUIRED 10~3600
Access Burst Type NO MAPPING REQUIRED
Access Control Class NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~65535
Access Control Allowed NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(No), YES(Yes)
Access Control Policy NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~31
Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer NO MAPPING REQUIRED
Access Control Policy Index NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~31
PS Initial Access Service Type NO MAPPING REQUIRED
Starting Point of the Access Control Window NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~9
Access Control Window Size NO MAPPING REQUIRED 1~10
Sliding Speed of the Access Control Window NO MAPPING REQUIRED 15~7200
Support Address and Control Field Compress NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(No), YES(Yes)
8BIT(8BIT), 11BIT(11BIT)
OSubcell(Overlaid subcell),
USubcell(Underlaid subcell), NoPrefer(No
preference)
ULPRIORITY(Uplink Priority),
NEUTRAL(Neutral Priority),
DLPRIORITY(Downlink Priority)
Additional Reselect Parameter Indication NO MAPPING REQUIRED
AMR ACS[F] NO MAPPING REQUIRED
AMR ACS[H] NO MAPPING REQUIRED
AMR ACS[WB] NO MAPPING REQUIRED
Activate L2 Re-establishment NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(No), YES(Yes)
AC Voltage Lower Threshold NO MAPPING REQUIRED 60~300
AC Voltage Upper Threshold NO MAPPING REQUIRED 60~300
Assignment Procedure in Intra-Cell HO Allowed NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(No), YES(Yes)
FMU Board Type NO MAPPING REQUIRED INDOOR(Indoor), OUTDOOR(Outdoor)
Allow Forced EFR in Cell NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(No), YES(Yes)
Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(No), YES(Yes)
Freq. and BSIC Optimize Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED OFF(OFF), ON(ON)
Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED OFF(OFF), ON(ON)
Freq. and BSIC Plan Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED OFF(OFF), ON(ON)
Frame Offset NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~255
FR Use Downlink DTX MAPPED NO(No), YES(Yes)
Frequency NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 1 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 10 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 11 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 12 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 13 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 14 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 15 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 16 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 17 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 18 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 19 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 2 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023
Frequency 20 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 21 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 22 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 23 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 24 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 25 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 26 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 27 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 28 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 29 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 3 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 30 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 31 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 32 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 33 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 34 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 35 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 36 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 37 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 38 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 39 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 4 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 40 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 41 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 42 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 43 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 44 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 45 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 46 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 47 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 48 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 49 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 5 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 50 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 51 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 52 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 53 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 54 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 55 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 56 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 57 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 58 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 59 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 6 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 60 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 61 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 62 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 63 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 64 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 7 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 8 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023Frequency 9 NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~1023
Frequency Adjust Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED NO(No), YES(Yes)
Frequency Adjust Value NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~65535
Frequency Band Attribute NO MAPPING REQUIRED
GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~100
Wait for REL Indication AMR FR NO MAPPING REQUIRED 3000~34000
T3109 for AMR HR NO MAPPING REQUIRED 3000~34000
Timer of Reserved TCH for EMC NO MAPPING REQUIRED 1~30
IBCA Wait SDCCH Idle Timer NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~60
Heating Equipment NO MAPPING REQUIRED
WE Longitude NO MAPPING REQUIRED
Humidification Equipment NO MAPPING REQUIRED
End Time of WLA Detection NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~24
WLA Prompting Recover Period NO MAPPING REQUIRED 1~255
INACTIVE(Inactive), ACTIVE(Active)
East_Longitude(East Longitude),
West_Longitude(West Longitude)
INACTIVE(Inactive), ACTIVE(Active)
Begin Time of WLA Detection NO MAPPING REQUIRED 0~24
Working Standard NO MAPPING REQUIRED
Work Mode NO MAPPING REQUIRED E1(E1), T1(T1)
Wait Time before OML Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED 30~300
Ring I Wait Time Before Switch NO MAPPING REQUIRED 60~300
GSM_AND_UMTS(GSM AND UMTS),
UMTS(UMTS), GSM(GSM)
Actual Value Range Unit Default Value Meaning
0~70 None 50
0~70 None 50
1~8, step:0.1 s 40
TRUE, FALSE None 0
NO, YES None YES
None IDLETSALLOC_0
CLOSE, OPEN None CLOSE
NO, YES None NO
Downlink quality level threshold for the MS to be assigned with a channel of the better cell.
Uplink quality level threshold for the MS to be assigned with a channel of the better cell.
The maximum duration for the BSC to select the best cell according to MRs in the MS
assigning procedure. The BSC assigns the channel of the serving cell to the MS if the best cell is not selected within the duration
specified by this parameter.
Whether to enable the BTS to support bypass function. HDLC BTS and IP BTS do not
support this parameter.
Whether to permit Abis flow control.The flow control function helps in better call
management. If congestion occurs, the system lightens its load by rejecting some services or prolonging the time for service requests. The Abis flow control is used to
This parameter controls the strategy for idle timeslot selection and optimization by the PS
channels.
This parameter controls whether the strategy for timeslot configuration and optimization is
started. When this parameter is set to ON, the bundled idle timeslots for the PS channel should be allocated to the same 64 kbit/s
timeslot as the primary link. When this parameter is set to OFF, the idle channels are allocated randomly in the transport pool of a
site.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function.It specifies whether the TCHH is preferentially
allocated to the MS by the BSC6900, when Abis resources are insufficient.
If the Abis resource load is greater than "Flex Abis Prior Choose Load Thred" or "Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred" when the parameter is set to "YES", the BSC6900
preferentially allocates the TCHH to the MS.
10~3600 s 15
8BIT, 11BIT None 8BIT
0~65535 None 0 Access control class of the MS
NO, YES None NO
0~31 None None
None Usubcell
0~31 None None
None NEUTRAL
0~9 None 0
1~10 None 2
15~7200 s 120
NO, YES None YES
Interval between detection of the Abis timeslot being in idle state and releasing of the Abis
timeslot. When channels are idle, the timer is started. When the timer is expires, the Abis
timeslot is released. When all the TBFs on the channel are released, the Abis timeslot is not released at once. Instead, the timer is started when the channels are idle. Before the timer expires, if new service request is received and the Abis timeslot is occupied, then the timer is stopped; otherwise, the timeslot is
released after the timer expires.When "Number of Dynamic Channel Pre-
Converted" is greater than 0, the Abis timeslots are not released after the static PDCH and pre-converted PDCH are idle.
Access pulse type of the PRACH, uplink PTCCH and packet control acknowledge
message of the MS.8bit: 8 bit pulse access mode; 11bit: 11 bit
pulse access mode.
When the cell supports Repeated This parameter specifies whether the access
control function is enabled in a cell. When the function is enabled, the BSC determines
which MSs in the cell to be connected to the network by sending the ACC classes through system messages according to the specified
policy in Access Control Policy.
This parameter specifies the index of the access control policy that is used in a cell.
OSubcell, USubcell, NoPrefer
Subcell preferred during the incoming inter-BSC handover to the concentric cell. In the case of incoming inter-BSC handover to the concentric cell, the channels in this subcell
are preferred.
This parameter specifies the index of an access control (ACC) policy. It is used to
identify an ACC policy.
ULPRIORITY, NEUTRAL, DLPRIORITY
Whether the initial service is uplink, downlink or neutral
This parameter is used to specify the starting point of the ACC sliding window in an access
control policy.
This parameter is used to specify the ACC sliding window size in an access control
policy. MSs of the ACC access classes that are specified in the sliding window are not
allowed to access the network.
This parameter is used to specify the sliding speed of the ACC sliding window in an
access control policy.
A flag bit indicates Whether to support the compression of the address and control fields.
None FLEX
None
None
0~7 None
NO, YES None NO
60~300 V 180
60~300 V 280
NO, YES None NO
COMPUL0, COMPUL1, FLEX
Used for notifying MSs where to retrieve relevant parameters during cell reselection.The default value of this parameter is 0 in system message 3 and, has no special
significance.In system message 4, if the value of this
parameter is 0, it means that the MSs must retrieve the PI parameters and other
parameters relevant to cell reselection and the parameters relevant to C2 calculation
from the remaining bytes of system message 4.If the value is 1, it means that the MS must retrieve the parameters from the remaining
Active coding set (ACS)[H], indicates set of half-rate coding rates currently available for calls. The AMR is a set of multiple speech
coding and decoding rates.
6_60KBIT/S-1&8_85KBIT/S-
1&12_65KBIT/S-1
Active coding set (ACS)[WB], indicates a set of wide-band coding rates currently available for calls. The AMR is a set of multiple speech
coding and decoding rates.
Whether to activate the function of L2 re-establishment. If this function is activated, the BSC starts the attempt of L2 re-establishment
when the BSC receives an ERR IND message reported by the BTS in a conversation of MSs. If the L2 re-
establishment succeeds, the conversation continues; otherwise, a call drop occurs.
AC voltage alarm lower threshold. When the input AC voltage is lower than the value of
this parameter, an alarm indicating the abnormal AC is reported.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
The BTS reports an alarm if the AC voltage exceeds the value of the AC voltage alarm
upper threshold. When the input AC voltage is higher than the value of this parameter, an
alarm indicating the abnormal AC is reported.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter must be the same as the value of the parameter in other modes.
Whether to hand over an MS to another channel during an intra-cell handover through
the assignment process
0~254 None None
0, 1, 2 None 2
OFF, ON None OFF
None None
Lock, Unlock, Shutdown None UNLOCK Administrative state of a cell
Lock, Unlock, Shutdown None Unlock Administrative state of the TRX
Communication address of the CBUS3 on the bus 485. The configuration of this parameter must be consistent with the actual physical connection. Otherwise, the board may not
work properly.
Mode of dynamically adjusting the EGPRS uplink encoding scheme.
Value 0 indicates dynamic adjustment of EGPRS uplink coding scheme is not
supported; value 1 indicates that the uplink coding
scheme is adjusted according to downlink quality measurements reported by MS; value 2 indicates that the uplink coding
scheme is adjusted according to uplink quality measurements reported by BTS.
This parameter specifies whether to enable automatic auto-loading and auto-activation of the BTS software. If this parameter is set to
Yes, the BTS software is automatically loaded and activated when the BTS is initialized or a
board is added; the TMU software is automatically loaded and activated when the BTS is initialized or BSC starts checking res.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS software fails to be forcibly loaded and
activated. If this parameter is set to No, the BTS software can be successfully forcibly
loaded and activated.
COMMON_DLD, QUICK_DLD1, QUICK_DLD2
This parameter specifies the automatic load mode of the BTS software. If this parameter is set to common download, common loading is performed on the OML/EML, and the link is
not extended. If this parameter is set to quick download(without traffic), quick loading can be performed on the dynamically extended link besides the OML/EML. This may affect
the services in the cell. If this parameter is set to quick download(reserve BCCH Trx traffic),
quick loading can be performed on the dynamically extended link besides the
OML/EML. This should not affect the services on the main BCCH TRX of the cell.
1~51 characters None None
1~51 characters None None
This parameter specifies the software version 1 that is automatically loaded and activated.
The version of the BTS software stored on the OMU must be consistent with this version
number. Otherwise, a software version inconsistency alarm is reported. An example
of the version format is as follows: BTS3000V100R008C11SPC003.
This parameter can be set to only a BTS software version or a cold patch version. You
can use either of the following methods to query the version number of the BTS software
or the cold patch.Method 1: If the BTS software or the cold
patch is downloaded to the OMU through the MML command DLD BTSSW, you can run
the MML command LST BTSSW to obtain the number of the version to be loaded according
to the returned result.Method 2: If the BTS software version or the cold patch is not downloaded to the OMU,
you can decompress the BTS software package or cold patch package. Then, check the vercfg.xml file in the level-1 directory of
the compressed package. The value after the label "SoftwareVersion" is the software
version.
This parameter specifies the software version 2 that is automatically loaded and activated. The BTS software stored on the OMU must
be consistent with this version number. Otherwise, the software version inconsistency
alarm may be reported. An example of the version format is as follows:
BTS3000V100R008C11SPC003. This parameter can be set to only a BTS
software version or a cold patch version. You can use either of the following methods to
query the version number of the BTS software or the cold patch.
Method 1: If the BTS software or the cold patch is downloaded to the OMU through the MML command DLD BTSSW, you can run
the MML command LST BTSSW to obtain the number of the version to be loaded according
to the returned result.Method 2: If the BTS software version or the cold patch is not downloaded to the OMU,
you can decompress the BTS software package or cold patch package. Then, check the vercfg.xml file in the level-1 directory of
the compressed package. The value after the label "SoftwareVersion" is the software
version.
1920~30720, step:480 ms 64_Times
0~30240, step:480 ms 48
1920~30720, step:480 ms 52_Times
0~30240, step:480 ms 32
1~60 min 15
OFF, ON None OFF
0~100 per cent 100
0~16 None 4
Counter for radio link failures during an AMR full rate call. See the description of "Radio Link Timeout" in "SET GCELLCCBASIC".
Number of SACCH multiframes during an AMR full rate call. See the description of
"SACCH Multi-Frames" in "SET GCELLCCBASIC".
Counter for radio link failures during an AMR half rate call. See the description of "Radio Link Timeout" in "SET GCELLCCBASIC".
Number of SACCH multiframes during an AMR half rate call. See the description of
"SACCH Multi-Frames" in "SET GCELLCCBASIC".
Delay time for mutual-aid detection on a cell after the cell is initialized. When the cell
initialization has just finished, the cell is in an unstable state. Mutual-aid detection at this
time may cause a wrong decision. Therefore, this parameter is used for specifying proper
delay.
When this parameter is set to ON, the GMM/SM signaling service is assigned only
one PDCH; otherwise, the GMM/SM signaling service is assigned one or more PDCHs as
required.
Maximum ratio of the number of AMR half rate channels to the total number of channels
in a cell. When the resource allocation principle is determined by the BSC, no AMR half rate channel can be further assigned if
the ratio of the number of AMR half rate channels to the total number of channels in
the cell is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. When the resource allocation principle is not determined by the BSC, radio resource allocation does not depend on the
setting of this parameter.Total number of channels = number of half
rate channels + number of full rate channels x 2
Number of allowed measure report missed. If the number of allowed measure report missed
exceeds this value, the previous measure report is invalid.
0~100 per cent 100
None 6
None DISABLED
None DISABLED
None DISABLED
None DISABLED
None DISABLED
None DISABLED
2~32, step:2 dB 16
OFF, ON None ON
NO, YES None NO
Maximum ratio of the number of half rate channels to the total number of channels in a cell. When the resource allocation principle is determined by the BSC, no half rate channel
can be further assigned if the ratio of the number of half rate channels to the total
number of channels in the cell is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. When
the resource allocation principle is not determined by the BSC, radio resource
allocation does not depend on the setting of this parameter.
Total number of channels = number of half rate channels + number of full rate channels x
2
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
It is used to perform open loop power control. Alpha parameter is used by the MS to
calculate the output power PCH of the uplink PDCH. This parameter is used to set the
reduced class of the Tx power of the MS, in correspondence with the path loss, when the
GPRS dynamic power control is enabled.
DISABLED, ENABLED
Whether to supply power to the TMA on tributary 0
DISABLED, ENABLED
Whether to supply power to the TMA on tributary 1
DISABLED, ENABLED
Whether to supply power to the TMA on tributary 2
DISABLED, ENABLED
Whether to supply power to the TMA on tributary 3
DISABLED, ENABLED
Whether to supply power to the TMA on tributary 4
DISABLED, ENABLED
Whether to supply power to the TMA on tributary 5
Maximum degree by which the BSC can control the power of the AMR BTS
dynamically
Whether to enable the III power control algorithm for AMR calls. If enabled, power
control is performed on AMR calls.
Whether to enable the adaptive adjustment function of AMR downlink threshold. After this
function is enabled, the BTS estimates the long-term voice quality (indicated by the long-term FER(frame erase ratio)) and compares the estimated result with the specified target voice quality. If the estimated result does not conform to the target voice quality, it indicates that the current AMR handover threshold may
not be the best for the current radio conditions. In this case, the BSC6900 adjust threshold adaptively according to the relation between the estimated voice quality and the
target voice quality.
ms 5
0~3 None 0
0~7 None 0
0~7 None 3
ms 5
0~7 None 2
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging downlink AMR signal strength. A
single measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately.
Therefore, the BSC needs to average the measured values in several successive measurement reports to reflect the radio
environment.
Number of downlink AMR measurement reports that the BSC predicts. The BSC takes a while to confirm the power control effect of a
power control command. Thus, the BSC makes a power control decision based on a
measurement report that lags behind the changes in the receive level and quality instead of reflecting the real-time radio
environment. As a result, the power control is late.
To prevent late power control to a certain degree, the power control algorithm involves a measurement report prediction filter. The
BSC can sample several downlink measurement reports in a short time and filter them according to a specific weight to predict
future N measurement reports.This parameter specifies the number N.
Quality level threshold for decreasing downlink AMR signal power. If the BTS
transmits AMR signals at a quality level less than "AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold", the
BSC decreases the power of the BTS. If (downlink receive level - "AMR MAX Down
Adj. PC Value by Qual.") < "AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold", the BSC does not adjust
the transmit power.
Quality level threshold for increasing downlink AMR signal power. If the BTS transmits AMR signals at a quality level greater than "AMR
DL Qual. Lower Threshold", the BSC increases the power of the BTS. If (downlink receive level + "AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value
by Qual.") > "AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold", the BSC does not adjust the
transmit power.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging downlink AMR signal quality. A
single measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately.
Therefore, the BSC needs to average the measured values in several successive measurement reports to reflect the radio
environment.
During downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality level is equal to or greater than
this threshold, "AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" is increased by "AMR DL Qual
Bad UpLEVDiff" to further increase the expected downlink power level.
0~63 dB 8
0~63 dB 33
0~63 dB 25
NO, YES None NO
0~255 dB 2
0~255 dB 20
During downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality level is equal to or greater than "AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold", "AMR DL
RX_LEV Upper Threshold" is increased by "AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff" to further
increase the expected downlink power level.
Upper threshold for downlink AMR signal strength.
If the downlink received AMR signal level is greater than this threshold, a power decrease is computed. Then, the power is decreased
by the least of the power decrease, maximum power adjustment step allowed by the quality
zone to which the received signal quality belongs, and "AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value
by Qual.".Power decrease = downlink received signal level - ("AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold"
+ "AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold")/2The maximum power adjustment step allowed
by the quality zone is chosen from "AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0", "AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1", and
"AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2" according to the quality zone.
Lower threshold for downlink AMR signal strength.
If the downlink received AMR signal level is less than this threshold, a power increase is computed. Then, the power is increased by the least of the power increase, "AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV", and "AMR
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.".Power increase = ("AMR DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold" + "AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold")/2 - downlink received signal level.
Whether to enable the algorithm for the load-based AMR handover between full rate and
half rate
With "F-H Ho Period" and the duration for triggering handover from full rate to half rate, this parameter determines the current ATCB offset by which to choose the MSs to undergo
handover from full rate to half rate.ATCB offset = (duration for triggering
handover from full rate to half rate/"F-H Ho Period" + 1) x "AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust
Step"
ATCB threshold for the AMR handover from full rate to half rate. If the ATCB of an AMR full rate call is equal to or greater than this
threshold, the AMR call is handed over from full rate to half rate.
0~255 dB 1
0~255 dB 100
0~7 None 0
0~100 per cent 75
0~255 dB 4
0~255 dB 108
NO, YES None NO
0~7 None 3
0~100 per cent 15
0~32 dB 8
0~30 dB 2
With "F-H Ho Period" and the duration for triggering handover from full rate to half rate, this parameter determines the current path loss offset by which to choose the MSs to
undergo handover from full rate to half rate.Path loss offset = (duration for triggering
handover from full rate to half rate/"F-H Ho Period" + 1) x "AMR F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust
Step"
Path loss threshold for the AMR handover from full rate to half rate. If the path loss of an AMR full rate call is equal to or less than this threshold, the AMR call is handed over from
full rate to half rate.
Quality threshold for the AMR handover from full rate to half rate. If the uplink and downlink receive quality levels of an AMR full rate call are equal to or less than this threshold, the
AMR call is handed over from full rate to half rate.
Load threshold for the AMR handover from full rate to half rate. If the cell load is greater
than this threshold, the AMR full rate calls are handed over to half rate.
ATCB threshold for the AMR handover from half rate to full rate. If the ATCB of an AMR half rate call is less than this threshold, the
AMR call is handed over from half rate to full rate.
Path loss threshold for the AMR handover from half rate to full rate. If the path loss of an
AMR half rate call is greater than this threshold, the AMR call is handed over from
half rate to full rate.
Whether to enable the algorithm for the uplink and downlink receive quality based AMR
handover from half rate to full rate
Quality threshold for the AMR handover from half rate to full rate. If the receive quality level
of an AMR half rate call is greater than this threshold, the AMR call is handed over from
half rate to full rate.
Load threshold for the AMR handover from half rate to full rate. If the cell load is less than
this threshold, the AMR half rate calls are handed over to full rate.
Maximum step by which the power can be increased according to received signal quality
Maximum step by which the power can be decreased when the received signal quality
belongs to quality zone 0. Huawei power control algorithm generation II classifies the received signal quality into three
quality zones. The maximum step by which the power can be decreased according to signal level varies according to the quality
zones.
0~30 dB 0
0~30 dB 0
0~32 dB 8
NO, YES None YES
480~7200, step:480 ms 3
0~4 dB 4
0~15 None 0
Maximum step by which the power can be decreased when the received signal quality
belongs to quality zone 1. Huawei power control algorithm generation II classifies the received signal quality into three
quality zones. The maximum step by which the power can be decreased according to signal level varies according to the quality
zones.
Maximum step by which the power can be decreased when the received signal quality
belongs to quality zone 2. Huawei power control algorithm generation II classifies the received signal quality into three
quality zones. The maximum step by which the power can be decreased according to signal level varies according to the quality
zones.
Maximum step by which the power can be increased according to received signal level
Whether to enable the compensation of AMR measurement reports in Huawei power
control algorithm generation IIIf this parameter is set to YES, Huawei power control algorithm generation II puts a currently
received measurement report into the measurement report compensation queue.
Then, the algorithm records the change in the transmit power based on the MS/BTS power in the measurement report. According to the power change, the algorithm compensates
the received signal level in a history measurement report after measurement
report interpolation.Before making a power control decision, the
BSC samples and weights the received signal level and quality in several history
measurement reports. The MS/BTS transmit power may vary over these measurement
reports. To ensure the accuracy of the received signal level and quality to be
weighted, the power control algorithm needs to compensate the received signal level and quality in the history measurement reports where the transmit power differs from the
current transmit power.
Minimum interval between two consecutive AMR power control commands
Maximum step by which the power can be decreased according to received signal
quality
Number of levels by which the BTS increases the power of an SACCH frame. This
parameter is used for SACCH power control. When sending an SACCH frame, the BTS
increases the power of the SACCH frame by this specified number of levels.
OFF, ON None ON
0~99 per cent 55
NO, YES None NO
ms 5
0~3 None 0
0~7 None 0
Whether to enable the BSC to assign AMR half rate channels preferentially according to the channel types allowed by the MSC and
the current TCH seizure ratio of the cell
Load threshold for assigning half rate channels preferentially. If the current TCH seizure ratio of the cell is greater than this
threshold, AMR half rate channels are assigned preferentially.
Whether to enable the adaptive adjustment function of AMR uplink threshold. After this function is enabled, the BTS estimates the
long-term voice quality (indicated by the long-term FER(frame erase rate)) and compares the estimated result with the specified target voice quality. If the estimated result does not conform to the target voice quality, it indicates that the current AMR handover threshold may
not be the best for the current radio conditions. In this case, the BSC uses the relevant algorithm to adjust the adaptive
threshold according to the relation between the estimated voice quality and the target
voice quality.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging uplink AMR signal strength. A
single measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately.
Therefore, the BSC needs to average the measured values in several successive measurement reports to reflect the radio
environment.
Number of uplink AMR measurement reports that the BSC predicts. The BSC takes a while to confirm the power control effect of a power
control command. Thus, the BSC makes a power control decision based on a
measurement report that lags behind the changes in the receive level and quality instead of reflecting the real-time radio
environment. As a result, the power control is late.
To prevent late power control to a certain degree, the power control algorithm involves a measurement report prediction filter. The
BSC can sample several downlink measurement reports in a short time and then weigh them to predict future N measurement
reports.This parameter specifies the number N.
Quality level threshold for decreasing the power of an uplink AMR call. If the MS
transmits AMR signals at a quality level less than "AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold", the
BTS decreases the power of the MS. If (uplink receive level - "AMR MAX Down Adj. PC
Value by Qual.") < "AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold", the BTS does not adjust the
transmit power.
0~7 None 3
ms 5
0~7 None 3
0~63 dB 6
0~63 dB 30
Quality level threshold for increasing the power of an uplink AMR call. If the MS transmits AMR signals at a quality level
greater than "AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold", the BTS increases the power of the MS. If (uplink receive level + "AMR MAX
Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.") > "AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold", the BTS does not
adjust the transmit power.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging uplink AMR signal quality. A single
measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately.
Therefore, the BSC needs to average the measured values in several successive measurement reports to reflect the radio
environment.
During uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality level is equal to or greater than
this threshold, "AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" is increased by "AMR UL Qual.
Bad UpLEVDiff" to further increase the expected uplink power level.
During uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality level is equal to or greater than
"AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold", "AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" is increased
by "AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff" to further increase the expected uplink power level.
Upper threshold for uplink AMR signal strength
If the uplink received AMR signal level is greater than this threshold, a power decrease is computed. Then, the power is decreased
by the least of the power decrease, maximum power adjustment step allowed by the quality
zone to which the received signal quality belongs, and "AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value
by Qual.".Power decrease = uplink received signal level
- ("AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" + "AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold")/2
The maximum power adjustment step allowed by the quality zone is chosen from "AMR
MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0", "AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1", and
"AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2" according to the quality zone.
0~63 dB 18
0~1000 m 0
None NOPOWER
A, B, NULL None NULL
0~80 per cent 50
5~126 None 100
5~100 per cent 100
OFF, ON None OFF
Lower threshold for uplink AMR signal strength.
If the uplink received AMR signal level is less than this threshold, a power increase is
computed. Then, the power is increased by the least of the power increase, "AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV", and "AMR
MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.".Power increase = ("AMR UL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold" + "AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold")/2 - uplink received signal level.
Length of the feeder cable. The GPS satellite card is connected to the antenna through
feeder cables. The transmission delay on the feeder cable can be calculated on the basis of the length of the feeder cable, thus increasing
the timing accuracy of the satellite card.
SENDPOWER, NOPOWER
Power supply switch of the GPS antenna feeder
Antenna pass number of the downlink tributary
Threshold for reporting the recovery alarm for the abnormal release alarm. If the percentage of the abnormal channel releases is equal to
or less than this threshold, the recovery alarm for the abnormal release alarm is reported.
That is, the abnormal release alarm is cleared.
Release statistics base for subchannels. This parameter indicates the number of times that a subchannel is activated. In a timeslot, the release statistics base, B, multiplied by the
number of channels, N, is the channel release sum, S.
If the percentage of the abnormal channel releases in the latest S channel releases
exceeds the Abnormal Warn Threshold, the abnormal release alarm is reported.
If the percentage of the abnormal channel releases in the latest S channel releases is equal to or less than the Abnormal Release
Threshold, the recovery alarm for the abnormal release alarm is reported. That is,
the abnormal release alarm is cleared.
Threshold for reporting the abnormal release alarm. In a timeslot, the release statistics
base, B, multiplied by the number of channels, N, is the channel release sum, S. If
the percentage of the abnormal channel releases in the latest S channel releases
exceeds this threshold, the abnormal release alarm is reported.
Switch for assigning the channel of a better cell to the MS during MS access.
DISABLE, ENABLE None DISABLE
0~61 dB 35
0~23, 255 None None
0~23 None None
500~60000 ms 10000
NO, YES None NO
0~63 dB 2
When this parameter is set to ENABLE, if the cell supports direct retry and the current cell load is equal to or larger than the value of
"Cell direct retry forbidden threshold" in "SET GCELLOTHEXT" during the assignment, the
BSC6900 continues with the direct retry procedure. When this parameter is set to
DISABLE, the current call applies for channels in its own cells. If the application
fails, it continues with the direct retry procedure.
Offset relative to the level threshold for determining whether to assign a channel in
the overlaid subcell
Number of the slot where the associated RXU board is installed.
Number of the slot where the associated RXU board is installed.
After the BSC6900 delivers an assignment command, the T3107 timer starts. If the
BSC6900 receives an assignment complete message within the scheduled time, the
T3107 timer stops. If the timer expires, the BSC6900 sends an assignment failure
message.
Whether to enable the ATCB handover algorithm for the concentric cell. According to the neighbor cell signal, the ATCB handover
algorithm determines the coverage of the overlaid subcell and balances the load between the overlaid subcell, underlaid
subcell, and neighbor cell. Therefore, the algorithm helps to decrease the interference, to improve the conversation quality, and to achieve aggressive frequency reuse in the
overlaid subcell.
Hysteresis in the distance between the boundary of the overlaid subcell and the boundary of the underlaid subcell. This
parameter helps to adjust "Distance Between Boudaries of Subcells" and thus to prevent
ping-pong handover between the overlaid and underlaid subcells. Assume that the signal
strength of the serving cell is SS(s) and that the signal strength of the neighbor cell is
SS(n). If SS(s) - SS(n) < "Distance Between Boudaries of Subcells" - "Distance Hysteresis Between Boudaries", the MS is handed over
from the overlaid subcell to the underlaid subcell.
0~63 dB 10
NO, YES None YES
0~15 dB 0 TMA attenuation factor of antenna tributary 1
0~15 dB 0 TMA attenuation factor of antenna tributary 2
SERVER, CLIENT None None
1~64 characters None None
1~16 characters None None
NO_V, PAP_V, CHAP_V None NO_V
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
DISABLED, ENABLED None ENABLED Whether to enable the auto-negotiation mode
None None
Distance between the boundary of the overlaid subcell and the boundary of the
underlaid subcell. This parameter specifies the difference between the coverage of the
overlaid subcell and the coverage of the underlaid subcell in the concentric cell or
dual-frequency network scenario. The boundaries of the overlaid and underlaid subcells are determined according to the
relative value between the signal strength of the serving cell and the signal strength of the neighbor cell. Assume that the signal strength of the serving cell is SS(s) and that the signal strength of the neighbor cell is SS(n). If SS(s)
= SS(n), the MS is on the boundary of the underlaid subcell. If SS(s) - SS(n) > "Distance Between Boudaries of Subcells", the MS is in
the coverage of the overlaid subcell.In the tight BCCH handover algorithm, this parameter specifies the difference between
the coverage of the TRX that carries the BCCH and the coverage of the TRX that does
not carry the BCCH. The relevant computation is the same as the preceding
computation.
Attach-detach Allowed (ATT). If this parameter is set to YES, when an MS is
powered off, the network does not process any call connection for the MS as a called party. In this way, the network processing
time and resources are saved.
Validation mode of the PPP or MLPPP link negotiation
Username to validate, for the PPP or MLPPP link negotiation
Password to validate, upon PPP or MLPPP link negotiation
Type of the validation protocol for the PPP or MLPPP link negotiation
Whether to allow automatic adjustment for the uplink threshold and hysteresis of full rate
AMR call rates
Whether to allow automatic adjustment for the uplink threshold and hysteresis of half rate
AMR call rates
BTSAUTODLDACT, TMUAUTOACT
The parameter specifies the work mode for the automatic download and activation of the
BTS software. BTS Software Auto DL and ACT indicates that the BTS boards are
downloaded and activated as required. TMU Software Auto ACT indicates that only the TMU/DTMU/GTMU software is activated.
0~70 None 55
1~64 characters None None
BYTRX, BYPWR None BYTRX
None BYCOVER
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
1~200 s 20
Quality threshold for determining that a call is disconnected because of poor quality. If the
uplink quality or downlink quality in the measurement reports during the period of "Timer for Bad Quality DISC Statistic" is
higher than the value of this parameter before the call is disconnected, you can infer that the call disconnection is due to poor quality. This
parameter can be used to calculate the number of call disconnections due to poor
quality.
Bar code 2 of the interface board of the BTS. This parameter is the electronic serial number of the standby PTU board. An electronic serial
number uniquely identifies an PTU board. This parameter is set before delivery.
This parameter specifies the method of saving the BTS backup power.
When this parameter is set to "Turn off TRX", the BSC preferentially shuts down some
TRXs when the BTS experiences a power failure. When this parameter is set to "Reduce
Backup Power", the BSC saves the power according to the configured "Backup Power Saving Policy" when the BTS experiences a
power failure.
BYCOVER, BYCAP, BYSAVING
This parameter specifies the backup power saving policy of the BTS.
When this parameter is set to "Cover Priority", the BTS shuts down some TRXs, waits for a
certain period of time, and then decreases the power of the BCCH TRX. When this
parameter is set to "Capability Priority", the BTS decreases the power of the BCCH TRX,
waits for a certain period of time, and then shuts down some TRXs. When this parameter is set to "Saving Priority", the BTS shuts down
some TRXs and meanwhile decreases the power of the BCCH TRX.
Whether the cells at the 1900 frequency support high frequency 1900
Whether the cells at the 850 frequency support high frequency 1900
Whether the cells at the 900 frequency support high frequency 1900
Duration in which intra-cell handover is forbidden after the number of consecutive
intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum. Intra-cell handover can be conducted again
only after this duration.
None Battery1Temp
None Battery1Temp
30~1000 Ah 50
NO, YES None NO
0~90 per cent 50
None NO_BAT
0~254 None 8
Battery1Temp, Battery2Temp
Number of the temperature sensor corresponding to a battery group. You can
choose sensor 1 (Battery1Temp) or sensor 2 (Battery2Temp).
If you choose sensor 1, the system automatically uses sensor 1 to control the
temperature of the battery group and performs temperature compensation, high
temperature protection, and overtemperature alarm accordingly.
The system handling principles are the same if you choose sensor 2.
For the EPS4815 boards, this parameter can only be configured as "Battery1Temp".
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Battery1Temp, Battery2Temp
Number of the temperature sensor corresponding to a battery group.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Battery capacity.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether the configuration of external battery is allowed. The value "YES" indicates that the
external battery can be configured, and the value "NO" indicates that the external battery
cannot be configured.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Allowed percentage of the battery discharging. After the AC power supply is cut and the power of the battery is discharged by the value of this parameter, the diesel engine
is started to supply the power.
NO_BAT, INSIDE_BAT, OUTSIDE_BAT
Battery type.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Reference difference between uplink and downlink levels. This parameter works with
"Up Down Balance Floating Range" to count uplink-downlink imbalances.
0~5000 Ah 36
0~7 None None
0~7 None None
0~7 None None
0~1023 None None BCCH frequency of the cell0~1023 None None Frequency of the BCCH TRX
NO_Hop, Hop None None
5~25 per cent 15
43.3~57.6 (step: 0.1) V 565
NO, YES None NO
1~10 None 8
1~10 None 4
Battery capacity. The battery capacity should be set according to the vendor specification. If it is improperly configured, the battery life may
be shortened.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Base station color code (BCC) of a cell, provided by the network planning department.
It is used for differentiating the neighboring cells using the same BCCH frequency. A
BCC and a network color code (NCC) compose a base station identity code (BSIC).
Base station color code (BCC) of a cell, provided by the network planning department.
It is used for differentiating the neighboring cells using the same BCCH frequency. A
BCC and a network color code (NCC) compose a base station identity code (BSIC).
BTS color code. It uniquely identifies different BTSs that are adjacent and use the same
TRX.
Frequency hopping mode of the TRX that carries the BCCH
Current limit coefficient of the battery. The maximum charging current equals the value
of "Battery Current Limiting Coefficient" multiplexed by "Battery Capacity". If the charging current is 5 A higher than the
maximum charging current, the overcharge alarm is reported.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Boost-Charging Voltage. See the vendor specification for the setting of this parameter.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether the configuration of external battery is allowed.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
ARP1 priority in the BE service. ARP1 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
ARP2 priority in the BE service. ARP2 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
1~10 None 2
0~10 None 5
0~3 None 1
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None YES
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 6
10~254 None 30
ALL, PART None ALL
1~10 None 4
1~10 None 2
ARP3 priority in the BE service. ARP3 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Average period for sending the measurement report over the EGPRS channel
Number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be included in measurement report
This parameter specifies whether to allow 3G better cell handover algorithm.
Whether to enable the algorithm for the handover to a better cell
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover to a better cell due to
interference are met for P seconds within N seconds, the handover is triggered.
This parameter specifies the number P.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover to a better cell due to
interference are met for P seconds within N seconds, the handover is triggered.
This parameter specifies the number N.
Allowed fluctuation of the difference between uplink and downlink levels relative to the
reference difference. If the difference between uplink and downlink levels is outside the
fluctuation range, the uplink and downlink are considered imbalanced.
For example, assume that the Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and that the Up Down Balance Floating Range is set to 30. If the difference between uplink and
downlink levels is greater than 38 (= 8 + 30) or less than -22 (= 8 - 30), the uplink and
downlink are considered imbalanced. If the difference between uplink and downlink levels
is between -22 and 38, the uplink and downlink are considered balanced.
Mutual-aid changeback policy of baseband frequency hopping (FH). If multiple TRXs in a
baseband FH group are faulty and changeback is needed after mutual aid of the
baseband FH TRXs occurs: If you choose ALL, mutual-aid changeback is implemented after all the TRXs in the FH group recover; if
you choose PART, as long as any of the faulty TRXs recovers, it is changed back at
once and added to the FH group.
ARP1 priority in the Background service. ARP1 priority weight determines the number of the budget blocks and the block scheduling
priority.
ARP2 priority in the Background service. ARP2 priority weight determines the number of the budget blocks and the block scheduling
priority.
1~10 None 1
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, NULL None NULL
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, NULL None NULL
NO, YES None YES
0.5~8, step:0.5 s 1
0~127 dB 69
0.5~8, step:0.5 s 1
0~100000 (step: 100) kbit/s None
0~100000 (step: 100) kbit/s None
None None Type of the new RXU board.
0~255 s 0
1~80 characters None Cell name Contents of a cell broadcast message
2~3600 s 60 Time interval for a cell broadcast message
ARP3 priority in the Background service. ARP3 priority weight determines the number of the budget blocks and the block scheduling
priority.
Position of break point 1 in an RXU chain. The number of break points must not be
greater than the number of RXU boards in the RXU chain.
Position of break point 2 in an RXU chain. The number of break points must not be
greater than the number of RXU boards in the RXU chain.
Whether to enable the bad quality (BQ) handover algorithm. Whether to trigger BQ
handover depends on the uplink and downlink transmit quality (measured by using BER). If the uplink or downlink BQ exceeds the BQ
handover threshold, emergency BQ handover is triggered. The possible causes of BER
increase (or quality degradation) include too low signal power and channel interference.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for emergency BQ handover are met in P of N
measurement reports, the handover is triggered.
This parameter specifies the number P.
If ("downlink level of the neighbor cell after filtering" - "downlink level of the serving cell
(after power control compensation)") > ("Inter-cell HO Hysteresis" - "BQ HO Margin" + 64),
the BQ handover to the neighbor cell is triggered.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for emergency BQ handover are met in P of N
measurement reports, the handover is triggered.
This parameter specifies the number N.
The upper threshold of the total receive bandwidth of all the TRXs bound to the board, for example, when this value is 250, it means the the total receive bandwidth should be no
more than 25Mbits/s.
The upper threshold of the total send bandwidth of all the TRXs bound to send pass of board, for example, when this value is 150, it means the the total send bandwidth should
be no more than 15Mbits/s.
MRRU, GRRU, MRFU, GRFU, BTS3900E
To avoid intermittent blinking, the switchover cannot be performed over a certain period of
time when the OML is disconnected. That period of time is specified as ring II wait time
before switch.
0~7 None 1
0~15 None 10
NO, YES None YES
0~12 None 4 Number of PAGCH blocks
940~4230, step: 470 ms 2_M_PERIOD
1~4 None 1 Number of PBCCH blocks0~12 None 1 Number of PRACH blocks
BS-AG-BLKS-RES, indicating the number of the CCCH message blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCHs are configured, the value of this parameter indicates the actual seizure rates of the AGCHs and the PCHs
over the CCCHs.
This parameter is used to set the parameter BS_CV_MAX for MS countdown. This
parameter is used for the MS to calculate the CV. This parameter also determines the
duration of the timer T3198. When the MS sends one uplink RLC data block, the
receiving state of this data block is set to Pending and the timer T3198 is started. If the MS receives the packet uplink acknowledge
before the timer T3198 expires, the MS updates the receiving state of each uplink RLC data block according to the bit map in the message. If the timer T3198 of the RLC data block in the Pending state expires, the
MS sets the receiving state of this data block to Nack and retransmits the data bloc.
Whether to enable the BTS to transfer BTS/MS power class to the BSC
Number of multiframes in a cycle on a paging sub-channel. In fact, this parameter specifies
the number of paging sub-channels that a paging channel in a cell is divided into.
In an actual network, an MS does not listen to other paging sub-channels but its belonging paging sub-channel only. Refer to GSM Rec. 05.02 and GSM Rec. 05.08. The larger the
value of this parameter, the more the number of the paging sub-channels in a cell, and the fewer the number of the users belonging to each paging sub-channel. In this case, the
mean uptime of the MS battery can be prolonged. Refer to the computing mode of
paging group in GSM 05.02 of GSM Standards. The larger the value of this
parameter, however, the larger the time delay of a paging message in a space segment.
Thus, the average service performance of the system lowers. Based on the principle of ensuring that overload does not occur to
paging channels, you must set this parameter to a value as small as possible. You must
regularly measure the overload conditions of the paging channels in a running network and accordingly adjust the value of this parameter properly. A paging message in a location area must be sent in all the cells within this location
area at the same time. Therefore, the capacity of a paging channel of each cell in a location area must be the same or nearly the same. The capacity refers to the calculated number of paging sub-channels of each cell.
NO, YES None YES
PEUa, POUc, EIUa None None Board type
None None
None None Type of the newly added antenna board
Whether to support the paging function of the CS domain of the A interface. Yes: the MS can be called upon paging request on the A interface when handling the PS service; No:
the MS cannot be called upon paging request on the A interface when handling the PS
service. This parameter is valid only when the "A Interface Paging Co-ordination Switch" in "SET BSCPSSOFTPARA" is set to "Open".
DATU, GATM, DRRU, MRRU, MRFU, GRFU,
GRRU, BTS3900E
Type of the board that controls the RET antenna.
1. DATU: It may represent the DATU or the DATM and is applicable to the BTS3012,
BTS3012AE, BTS3012_II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E.
2. GATM: It is applicable to the BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM, BTS3036, and
BTS3036A.3.
RXU:DRRU,MRRU,MRFU,GRRU,GRFU,BTS3900E support the RET antenna connect
This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX Working Voltage Adjustment feature.
When this parameter is set to YES, the BSC6900 supports the feature where the power amplifier can use different working
voltages in different TRX modulation modes.
Peer equipment type of the BTS. This parameter indicates whether to connect the BTS to the BSC6900 or cascade the BTS to
another BTS.
BSC_Preprocessing, BTS_Preprocessing
Whether to enable the BTS to preprocess measurement reports. This parameter
determines where to conduct power control.
Name of the BTS, uniquely identifying a BTS in a BSC6900. This parameter cannot contain , ; = " ' more than two (include two) %, more
than two (include two) space, more than three (include three) +.
Connect BSC BTS Name.It is unique in one BSC.This parameter cannot contain ? | : < > "
@ # ! % ^ & * . [ ] / \ \\ '.
If the parameter is set to "ON", all the Ping packets are sent.
If the parameter is set to "OFF", all the Ping packets are discarded.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to shut down the BCCH TRX that is configured as "Shut Down Enabled" to save power after the BSC receives a power failure
message from the BTS. When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC shuts down all the TRXs that are configured
as "Shut Down Enabled", including the BCCH TRX, after receiving a power failure message from the BTS. When this parameter is set to No, the BSC shuts down only the non-BCCH
TRXs that are configured as "Shut Down Enabled" after receiving a power failure
message from the BTS.
2~32, step:2 dB 16
OFF, ON None OFF
1~250 None None
None None Type of the BTS
None None Type of the BTS
None NO_BAT
10~255 s 60
2~65534 None None Identifies a unique PTP BVC with NSE
2~65534 None None
None C31STANDARD
Maximum degree by which the BSC can control the power of the BTS dynamically
Whether to specify "Power Control threshold Adjust for SAIC" in the MML command "SET
GCELLPWR3"
Transmission compression ratio of a BTS. 1. Modifying the settings of "Transfers
Compress Rate" may change the bandwidth required by the BTS. That is, the current
bandwidth may be excessive or insufficient. If the bandwidth is insufficient, more secondary links should be added or timeslots should be
rearranged. 2. The greater the "Transfers Compress Rate" is, the smaller the
compression rate is and the greater the required bandwidth is. 3. The user can get the actual value through multiplying the value of this parameter by 0.01. The default value of
this parameter is 100, which means no compression.
Battery type.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
If the OML is not established at one port after a period of time, the OML switches to another
port and tries to connect to this port. That period of time is called ring II rotating duration
time.
The BSSGP virtual connection identifier. It is used to identify multiple BVCs that
multiplexes the NS-VC.
C31NOTUSE, C31STANDARD
Whether the reselection hysteresis parameter is applied to the C31 criterion
0~1 None 0
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
OFF, ON None None
None GSM900 Card Frequency Attribute
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
ms 2
Whether GPRS cell reselection offset is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. If
this parameter is set to 1, then only the positive hysteresis of the neighoring cell is
used in C32 calculation.
Whether to allow call re-establishment. Burst interference or blind spots due to high
buildings may lead to a radio link failure. If a call drop is caused by such a failure, the MS can start call re-establishment to resume the
conversation.
Whether an MS uses the calculated value as the final receive level value. The calculated receive level value is the measured receive
level value minus the receive level value obtained from the BCCH TRX timeslots. This
parameter is a cell option in system messages 3 and 6.
Whether to enable the capacity and coverage of the BTS to be automatically optimized according to the actual situation of the
incumbent network.
GSM900, DCS1800, GSM850, PCS1900
Used together with "Cell Bar Qualify" to decide the priority status of a cell. Refer to
GSM Rec. 04.08.Cell Bar Qualify Cell Bar Access Cell
selection priority Cell reselection priorityNO NO Normal
NormalNO YES Prohibited
ProhibitedYES NO Low
NormalYES YES Low
Normal
Used together with "Cell Bar Access" to decide the priority status of a cell. See GSM Rec. 0408. This parameter does not affect
cell reselection but cell selection only.Cell Bar Qualify Cell Bar Access Cell
selection priority Cell reselection priorityNO NO Normal Normal
NO YES Prohibited Prohibited
YES NO Low NormalYES YES Low
Normal
TCH:0~14880, step:480; SDCCH:0~14570,
step:470
Number of enhanced measurement reports (EMRs) sampled for averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH. Averaging the CV_BEP in
multiple EMRs helps to prevent the incomprehensiveness of a single EMR.
ms 6
0~255 s 15
20~100 per cent 80
0~100 per cent 90
0~42, step: 6 dB 0
dB 0
TCH:0~14880, step:480; SDCCH:0~14570,
step:470
Number of enhanced measurement reports (EMRs) sampled for averaging the CV_BEP
on the TCH. Averaging the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs helps to prevent the
incomprehensiveness of a single EMR.
Time interval for sending overload messages, used for the BTS to notify the BSC6900 of the load over a specific CCCH timeslot. See GSM
Rec. 0508.
This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot, that
is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages (such as paging messages and packet immediate
assignment messages) on the PCH. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. If the load on a
CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The
interval for sending the CCCH overload message is "CCCH Load Indication Period".
Threshold of forbidding directed retry for cells. When the value of "Assignment Cell Load
Judge Enable" in "SET GCELLCCBASIC" is ENABLE, if cells support directed retry and
the current cell load is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, the BSC allocates
a channel to an MS through the process of directed retry.
Offset of the measurement report of the cells at the 1800 MHz frequency. Before cells are
sequenced by priority, according to frequencies, the value of this parameter must
be added to the receive level value in the measurement report of the cells at the 1800
MHz frequency.The values of this parameter correspond to
the following decibel values:0: 0 dB1: 6 dB
...7: 42 dB
0~36, Positive infinity, step: 6
Threshold of the measurement report of the cells at the 1800 MHz frequency. When the
receive level value in the measurement report of the cells at the 1800 MHz frequency exceeds the value of this parameter, the
report takes effect. After being filtered, the measurement report is used for priority
sequencing of cells. The values of this parameter correspond to
the following decibel values:0: 0 dB1: 6 dB
...6: 36 dB
7: positive infinity
0~1023 None None
AUTO, MANU None None
0~1023 None None
AUTO, MANU None None
0~50 None 0
0~42, step: 6 dB 0
dB 0
BCCH frequency of a 2G neighbor cell that MSs can measure in idle mode. Recording the BCCH frequencies of 2G neighbor cells
that MSs can measure in idle mode, the BA1 table is sent in System Information 2, 2bis,
and 2ter.
Whether to generate the 2G BA1 table automatically according to neighbor cell
relations or to input the 2G BA1 table manually. Recording the BCCH frequencies
of 2G neighbor cells that MSs can measure in idle mode, the BA1 table is sent in System
Information 2, 2bis, and 2ter.
BCCH frequency of a 2G neighbor cell that MSs can measure in dedicated mode.
Recording the BCCH frequencies of 2G neighbor cells that MSs can measure in dedicated mode, the BA2 table is sent in
System Information 5, 5bis, and 5ter.
This parameter indicate whether to generate the 2G BA2 table automatically according to neighbor cell relations or to input the 2G BA2
table manually. Recording the BCCH frequencies of 2G neighbor cells that MSs can measure in dedicated mode, the BA2 table is sent in System Information 5, 5bis,
and 5ter.
Timeslot power attenuation level of the EDGE TRX in 8PSK. The attenuation level ranges
from 0 to 50, each of which corresponds to an attenuation of 0.2 dB.
When the EDGE TRX sends signals in 8PSK, the transmit power must be lower than the
mean power in GMSK.
Offset applied to the receive level of a GSM900 cell in the measurement report
before prioritizing cells by frequency bands. Before cells are sequenced by priority,
according to frequencies, the value of this parameter must be added to the receive level value in the measurement report of the cells
at the 900 MHz frequency.The values of this parameter correspond to
the following decibel values:0: 0 dB1: 6 dB
...7: 42 dB
0~36, Positive infinity, step: 6
Threshold of the measurement report of the cells at the 900 MHz frequency. The
measurement report is valid only when the receive level in the measurement report of the
GSM900 cell exceeds this threshold. After being filtered, the measurement report is used
for prioritizing the cells. The value 7 means infinite:0: 0 dB1: 6 dB
...6: 36 dB
7: positive infinity
Permit, NoPermit None Permit
None OUTDOOR_CELL
24.0~28.9 (step: 0.1) V 283
43.3~57.6 (step: 0.1) V 565
24.0~28.9 (step: 0.1) V 268
43.2~57.5 (step: 0.1) V 535
0~2047 None None
0~2047 None None
0~2047 None None
0~2047, 65535 None None
0~2047 None None
0~2047 None None Cell Index
BYNAME, BYID None None
BYNAME, BYID None None Index type of the cell
Inner, Extra None None
1, 2, 3, 4 None 3
0~5000 characters None None
Whether the cell can be added to the reselected candidate cell list. If this parameter
is set to "NoPermit", the cell cannot be reselected as the candidate cell for handover.
If this parameter is set to "Permit", the cell can be reselected as the candidate cell for
handover.
OUTDOOR_CELL, INDOOR_CELL
If the coverage type of a cell is outdoor coverage, the BTS detects whether the
standing wave alarm is generated only when the forward power is greater than 35 dBm.
If the coverage type of a cell is indoor coverage, the BTS detects whether the
standing wave radio alarm is generated only when the forward power is greater than 30
dBm.
Even charging voltage of the battery. The battery is charged at the voltage as specified
by this parameter.
Even charging voltage of the battery. The battery is charged at the voltage as specified
by this parameter.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Float charging voltage of the battery. The battery is charged at the voltage as specified
by this parameter.
Float charging voltage of the battery. The battery is charged at the voltage as specified
by this parameter.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Index of a cell, uniquely identifying a cell in a BSC6900
ID of the cell. The cell ID cannot conflict with other cell IDs in the BSC.
Index of a cell, uniquely identifying a cell in a BSC
Index of a cell, uniquely identifying a cell in a BSC6900
Index of a cell, uniquely identifying a cell in a BSC6900
Index type of a cell when this command is executed
This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This parameter
is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.
Layer of the cell. If the layer of the cell is lower, it is more likely that a handover to the
cell will be triggered.
List of cell indexes. All cell indexes are combined as a character string, separated by
"&". For example, 1&2&5.
0~255 None 80
1~64 characters None None
0~5000 characters None None
None 255
0~63 dB 30
0~63 None 1
1~20 None 4
NO, YES None YES
35.0~55.3 (step: 0.1) V 430
2G, 3G None 2G
Maximum number of SDCCHs in the cell. Before converting a TCH into an SDCCH, the BSC compares the number of SDCCHs after the conversion in the cell with "Cell SDCCH
Channel Maximum". If the number of SDCCHs after the conversion in the cell
exceeds this parameter, the BSC does not convert the TCH into an SDCCH.
Name of a cell, uniquely identifying a cell in a BSC6900
List of cell names. All cell names are combined as a character string, separated by "&". For example, cell1&cell2&cell5. The cell
name should not contain the following characters:
? | : < > " @ # ! % ^ & * . [ ] / \ \\ '
OP1, OP2, OP3, OP4, NONE
Power of each passage on the MRRU in the cell. When multiple operators are configured
on an MRRU, the parameter specifies the power of each operator on the MRRU.
Threshold of the downlink receive level of an over-coverage cell. If the downlink level of a cell is higher than the value of this parameter and the timing advance (TA) is greater than
the value of "Cell Over Coverage TA Threshold" in more than 20% measurement
reports, the cell is defined as an over-coverage cell.
Threshold of the TA of an over-coverage cell. If the downlink level of a cell is higher than the
value of this parameter and the timing advance (TA) is greater than the value of
"Cell Over Coverage TA Threshold" in more than 20% measurement reports, the cell is
defined as an over-coverage cell.
Maximum number of reported paging overload messages in the cell. If the BSC allows the flow control on the re-paging
messages, and the number of the reported paging overload messages exceeds the value
of this parameter, the BSC determines that the cell is in PCH overload state.
Whether to allow the power-off of the battery.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Battery power-off voltage.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell
reselection procedure.
0~100 per cent 30
None COMMON
NO, YES None NO
0.0~100.0 (step: 0.1) degree Celsius 800
-50.0~0.0 (step: 0.1) degree Celsius -200
NO, YES None NO
0~63 dB 20
The number of times that the downlink transmission quality of the MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of the MS ("EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold", "EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold", or "GPRS Quality
Threshold" by TBF type) is calculated accumulatively. When the rate of the
accumulated value to the number of received measurement reports on the downlink transmission quality (Packet Downlink
Ack/Nack message) is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, the emergency
reselection is triggered.
COMMON, MULTIPATH, INDOOR, HIGHWAY
Information about the cell scenario. It needs to be sent to the BTS. Based on the
information, the BTS optimizes the allocation of resources.
This parameter specifies whether to allow a mobile phone to preferentially camp on a 3G
cell after a call is terminated in the areas covered by both the GSM network and the
UMTS network.
Upper limit of the temperature measured by the temperature sensor of the battery group 1.
If the measured value is greater than the value of this parameter, the value of this
parameter is reported.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Lower limit of the temperature measured by the temperature sensor of the battery group 1.
If the measured value is smaller than the value of this parameter, the value of this
parameter is reported.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to allow the configuration of parameters related to the temperature
compensation of the battery groupIn multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Threshold of the downlink receive level of an weak-coverage cell. If the downlink level of a cell is lower than the value of this parameter and the timing advance (TA) is smaller than
the value of "Cell Weak Coverage TA Threshold" in more than 30% measurement
reports, the cell is defined as an weak-coverage cell.
0~63 None 1
20~90 per cent 80
NO, YES None None
AUTO, NORMAL None None
NO, YES None None
NO, YES None None
OFF, ON None None
None
Threshold of the TA of an weak-coverage cell. If the downlink level of a cell is lower than the
value of this parameter and the timing advance (TA) is smaller than the value of
"Cell Weak Coverage TA Threshold" in more than 30% measurement reports, the cell is
defined as an weak-coverage cell.
Threshold for stopping LAPD link congestion control. This parameter cannot be set too
small. If this parameter is set too small, the congestion control duration is too long, and thus the transmission capability of signaling
links cannot be fully used. The difference between the congestion start and end thresholds cannot be too small. If the
difference is too small, congestion control may be started frequently on signaling links.
Whether to allow the configuration of alarm parameters. The value "YES" indicates that the configuration is allowed, and the value "NO" indicates that the configuration is not
allowed. If the parameter is set to "YES", all the other parameters are reset to the default
values in this command.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
BTS configuration modes include auto plan mode and normal mode.
In auto plan mode, the user can enable the auto planning algorithms and auto
optimization algorithms according to the BTS type. In normal mode, the auto planning
algorithms and auto optimization algorithms are disabled.
Whether to enable the board parameters to be configured. If this parameter is set to
"YES", the user can set board parameters of the BTS cabinet. Otherwise, the user cannot
set the board parameters.
Whether to enable the board parameters to be configured. If this parameter is set to
"YES", the user can set the cabinet power type. Otherwise, the user cannot set the
cabinet power type.
If the parameter is set to 1, it indicates that the CGI and RAC data is generated through automatic planning. If the parameter is set to
0, it indicates that the data needs to be manually entered.
QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A,
QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_B
QUICK_HO_NCELL_TYPE_A
This parameter indicates the geographical relationship between the neighboring cell and the serving cell. In the BSC6900, if direction A
is selected, then the reverse direction is B.
None None
None CAPABILITY
0~100 per cent 0
0~100 per cent 100
NO, YES None YES
1~64 s 10
CHAINTORING, COMBINECHAINS
Combination type of chains. "CHAINTORING" indicates that one chain changes to a ring, and "COMBINECHAINS" indicates that two
chains are combined into one ring.
CAPABILITY, QUALITY, PSRELATIVELY, PSABSOLUTELY
Channel assignment priority of the cellIf this parameter is set to CAPABILITY, the factors are listed as follows in a descending
order of priority: capacity factors, quality factors, PS cooperation factors, and
management factors.If this parameter is set to QUALITY, the
factors are listed as follows in a descending order of priority: quality factors, capacity
factors, PS cooperation factors, and management factors.
If this parameter is set to PSRELATIVELY, the factors are listed as follows in a
descending order of priority: capacity factors, PS cooperation factors, quality factors, and
management factors.If this parameter is set to PSABSOLUTELY,
the factors are listed as follows in a descending order of priority: PS cooperation factors, capacity factors, quality factors, and
management factors.
This parameter specifies the proportion of available PDCHs in a cell. When the
proportion of available PDCHs in the cell is lower than this threshold, the BSC generates an alarm. When the proportion of available PDCHs in the cell is higher than or equal to
this threshold, the BSC generates a recovery alarm.
This parameter specifies the proportion of available TCHs in a cell. When the proportion of available TCHs in the cell is lower than this
threshold, the BSC generates an alarm. When the proportion of available TCHs in the cell is higher than or equal to this threshold,
the BSC generates a recovery alarm.
Whether to measure the channel interference during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to NO, the BSC does not measure the channel interference or send an interference indication during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the BSC measures
the channel interference during channel assignment.
This parameter is used to check whether the Abis timeslot for the PDCH is faulty. When the
out-of-synchronization period of the PDCH primary link exceeds the value of this
parameter, the Abis timeslot for the PDCH is regarded as faulty.
MODE1, MODE2, MODE3 None MODE2
MODE1, MODE2, MODE3 None MODE2
5~20 None 10
5~20 None 10
Alarm mode of the ANT_A tributary of an RXU board. There are three alarm modes. Alarm mode 1 has only one type of alarms. The alarm current is fixed and greater than
the normal working current. Alarm mode 2 has two types of alarms:
warning alarms and critical alarms. The alarm current is fixed and greater than the normal
working current. Alarm mode 3 has two types of alarms: warning alarms and critical alarms. The warning alarm current is periodical pulse current, while the critical alarm current is
fixed. When the parameter is set to 1, "ANT_A ALD Current Minor Alarm Occur Th", "ANT_A ALD Current Minor Alarm Clear Th", "A ALD Cur-Minor Alarm Over-Cur Duration", and "A ALD Cur-Minor Alarm N-Cur Duration" cannot be configured. When the parameter is set to 2,
"A ALD Cur-Minor Alarm Over-Cur Duration", and "A ALD Cur-Minor Alarm N-Cur Duration" cannot be configured. When the parameter is set to 3, "ANT_A ALD Current Minor Alarm Occur Th", and "ANT_A ALD Current Minor
Alarm Clear Th" cannot be configured.
Alarm mode of the ANT_B tributary of an RXU board. There are three alarm modes. Alarm mode 1 has only one type of alarms. The alarm current is fixed and greater than
the normal working current. Alarm mode 2 has two types of alarms:
warning alarms and critical alarms. The alarm current is fixed and greater than the normal
working current. Alarm mode 3 has two types of alarms: warning alarms and critical alarms. The warning alarm current is periodical pulse current, while the critical alarm current is
fixed. When the parameter is set to 1, "ANT_B ALD Current Minor Alarm Occur Th", "ANT_B ALD Current Minor Alarm Clear Th", "B ALD Cur-Minor Alarm Over-Cur Duration", and "B ALD Cur-Minor Alarm N-Cur Duration" cannot be configured. When the parameter is set to 2,
"B ALD Cur-Minor Alarm Over-Cur Duration", and "B ALD Cur-Minor Alarm N-Cur Duration" cannot be configured. When the parameter is set to 3, "ANT_B ALD Current Minor Alarm Occur Th", and "ANT_B ALD Current Minor
Alarm Clear Th" cannot be configured.
Total number of times that the BTS checks whether to switch off the air conditioner
Total number of times that the BTS checks whether to switch on the air conditioner
FULLTCH, HALFTCH None None
NO, YES None NO
0~65535 None None
0~65535 None None
0~22 dB 22
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None UNSUPPORT
HW_DEFINED, PTP None PTP
Channel type of the timeslot on the TRX. The channel type of timeslot 0 must not be set, because the combined BCCH is configured
by default. The channel type of other timeslots can be set to full-rate TCH or half-
rate TCH.
Whether to allow a multi-density TRX board, that uses the dynamic power sharing
algorithm to assign channels, to assign a channel to an MS when the remaining power on the multi-density TRX board is less than
the power required by the MS. If this parameter is set to YES, a multi-density TRX board that uses the dynamic power sharing
algorithm to assign channels cannot assign a channel to an MS when the remaining power on the multi-density TRX board is less than
the power required by the MS.If this parameter is set to NO, a multi-density TRX board that uses the dynamic power sharing algorithm to assign channels can assign a
channel to an MS when the remaining power on the multi-density TRX board is less than
the power required by the MS.
Identity code of a cell, A cell is a wireless coverage area identified by a base station
identity code and a global cell identification.Can be input in hexadecimal format. The hexadecimal format is H'****, for example,
H'1214.
Cell identity code. The cell is a radio coverage area that is identified by the BTS identity code
and global cell identity code.
This parameter specifies the estimated carrier-to-interference ratio of a new call. It is used for the Huawei power control algorithm
III to calculate the power of the call.
Whether the cell supports the MS with the DTM multi-timeslot capability of class 11
Type of the clock protocol for the IP clock server
None None
0~255 s 255
0~255 s 255
1~60 s 30
NO, YES None YES
1~1023 None None
INACTIVE, ACTIVE None INACTIVE
0~10, step:0.1 dB 45
INT_CLK, TRCBSC_CLK, EXTSYN_CLK, IP_TIME,
IP_TRANSFER, TRCGPS_CLK, UM_CLK,
PEER_CLK
Clock mode of the BTS.If this parameter is set to INT_CLK, the BTS
does not track any external clock. The internal high precision clock works in free-run mode.If this parameter is set to TRCBSC_CLK, the BTS tracks the clock signals received from
the BSC.If this parameter is set to EXCLK, the BTS tracks the clock signals received from the
external input clock.If this parameter is set to IP_TIME, the BTS
shakes hands through the IP network with the IP clock server for synchronization.
If this parameter is set to IP_TRANSFER, the BTS extracts the clock from an E1 when there is not an IP clock after the BTS upgrades the transmission mode from E1 transmission to
IP transmission.If this parameter is set to TRCGPS_CLK, the
BTS extracts the clock through the DGPS from the GPS.
If this parameter is set to UM_CLK, the BTS keeps pace with the signals broadcast on the downlink main BCCH of a neighboring BTS.If this parameter is set to PEER_CLK, the multimode BTS(GSM) keeps pace with the
signals that the other mode offer.
Delay for which the BTS waits to run the burglar alarm clearance command after
reporting the burglar alarm
Interval at which the BTS runs the burglar alarm clearance command automatically
Time delay in the detection of core network interface failure. Within the preset value of this parameter, the BSC6900 continuously detects core network interface failures and
then releases the management right of service objects.
Whether to adjust the candidate cell queue to give priority to intra-BSC/MSC handover
Number of a simple cell broadcast message. You can run "DSP GSMSCB" to query and
obtain the information.The value of this parameter cannot be 0.This parameter, "Geography Scope", and "Update" uniquely decide a cell broadcast
message.
Whether to start the refrigeration equipment of the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Combined loss used to estimate the downlink power during assignment
None
NO, YES None NO
BYNAME, BYID None None Index type of the BTS connected to BSC
Level of common access control, used for load control, allowing or forbidding the access
of some users of common access levels
Whether the BSC that controls the external cell and the local BSC belong to the same
MSC
Whether to enable the concentric cell handover algorithm. The concentric cell
handover helps to achieve wide coverage in the underlaid subcell and aggressive
frequency reuse in the overlaid subcell and to improve the system capacity and
conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified into two types: handover from the underlaid subcell to the
overlaid subcell and handover from the overlaid subcell to the underlaid subcell.
Minimum interval between the two consecutive handover decisions of an MS. The BSC cannot make a handover decision
during the minimum interval.To avoid frequent handover events in the cell,
the BSC starts a timer after delivering a handover command to an MS. The BSC
allows the MS to make a second handover decision only after the timer expires. This
parameter specifies the duration of the timer.
The twice intra-cell handover events during this interval are considered consecutive
handover events.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the BSC6900 to enable or disable the power
amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.
Whether to enable the BTS to support CRC4 check
0dB, 2dB, 4dB, 6dB, 8dB, 10dB, 12dB, 14dB
Cell reselection hysteresis. This is one of the parameters used for deciding whether to
reselect cells in different location areas. This parameter can avoid the increase of network
signaling traffic due to frequent location update and reduce the risk of losing paging
messages.
Time interval for the BTS resending a channel release message
Number of times the BTS resends a channel release message
0~126, step: 2 dB 0
0~7 None 5
30~100 per cent 90
0~7 None 3
4BURST, RLC/MAC None 4BURST
ms 4
ms 4
Cell Reselect Offset (CRO), indicating a correction of the C2.
Proper setting of this parameter can reduce the number of handover times, helpful for
assigning an MS to a better cell. In a special case that the PT is 31, the larger the CRO
value is, the lower the possibility of handing over an MS to the cell.
Generally, do not set the CRO to a value larger than 25 dB. The CRO with a too large
value will cause uncertain states in a network. The CRO values of the cells with different
priorities in a network are almost the same. Refer to GSM Rec. 05.08 and GSM Rec.
04.08. The setting of this parameter affects only the MSs supporting the protocol of GSM
Phase 2 or a later version.
Priority of the CS data service. The parameter is used for BSC6900 flow control.
The smaller the value of this parameter, the higher the priority.
Threshold for starting LAPD link congestion control. This parameter cannot be set too high. If this parameter is set too high, the signaling link may be congested before
congestion control is started. The congestion start and end thresholds cannot be set too
low. If they are set too low, congestion control may be started frequently on the signaling
link.
Priority of a speech service in the CS domain. The parameter is used for BSC6900 flow
control.The smaller the value of this parameter, the
higher the priority.
Format of the control acknowledge message of the MS. Four access bursts are used to
obtain timing advance without sending polling message; RLC/MAC control block is used to obtain timing advance after sending polling
message.
TCH:480~14880, step:480;
SDCCH:470~14570, step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging the signal quality on a speech/data
channel. Averaging the signal quality in multiple measurement reports helps to avoid a sharp signal quality drop due to Rayleigh
fading and to ensure the comprehensiveness of a handover decision.
TCH:480~14880, step:480;
SDCCH:470~14570, step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging the signal strength on a
speech/data channel. Averaging the signal strength in multiple measurement reports
helps to avoid a sharp signal level drop due to Rayleigh fading and to ensure the
Data service supported by the BSC6900. You can set this parameter according to actual
requirements.
Date when the TMU board software is released
Temperature error allowed when the temperature control system adjusts the
temperature.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether the primary BCCH is configured on the inner or extra part of an intelligent
underlay-overlay (IUO) cell
Index of a same group cell in an enhanced dual band network
Name of a same group cell in an enhanced dual band network
Index type of a same group cell in an enhanced dual band network
DC voltage alarm lower threshold. When the busbar output voltage is lower than the value
of this parameter, an alarm indicating the abnormal busbar voltage is reported.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
DC voltage alarm upper threshold. When the busbar output voltage is higher than the value
of this parameter, an alarm indicating the abnormal busbar voltage is reported.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
This parameter specifies the default pre-converted PDCHs in the dynamic transferable
channel pool.When this parameter is greater than 0, three sub-links are bound to the static PDCH and pre-converted PDCH in a cell by default.
The pre-converted PDCH can be preempted. You can set "Number of Reserved Dynamic Channel" as required when you expect the pre-converted PDCH not to be preempted.
Timer for delaying a connection release. This parameter is used for delaying the channel deactivation after the active signaling link is
broken. The purpose is to reserve some time for the disconnection that may be repeated. After receiving a REL IND message sent by
the BTS, the BSC6900 starts the timer. When the timer expires, the BSC6900 stops the
timer and sends the BTS an RF CHAN REL message.
INACTIVE, ACTIVE None INACTIVE
BSC, BTS None None Type of the object the BTS is connected to
BTS, BSC, DXX, OTHER None None
0~3071 None None
0~255 s None
0~16383 None None Downlink frequency of the external 3G cell
DISABLE, ENABLE None DISABLE
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None None
Whether to start the anti-theft equipment of the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Type of the object the BTS is connected to. Value range: BTS, BSC6900, and DXX
ID of the TRX that carries the destination main BCCH
Interval for sending test TRAU frames in the period of class-2 mute detection.Test TRAU frame is sent at the specified interval till the peer end responds or the timer of "Period of
Mute Detection Class 2" expires.
Whether to enable the diesel engine save switch
Whether to allow an MS to report the classmark and whether to hand over the MS from the SDCCH in the frequency band for the main BCCH to the SDCCH in a different frequency band according to the classmark
Whether to enable a directed retry. The directed retry is to hand over an MS to a
neighboring cell in the same procedure as the handover. The directed retry is an emergency measure applicable to abnormal traffic peaks in some areas of a radio network. You should not use the directed retry as a major means of solving traffic congestion. If the directed retry always occurs in some areas of a network,
consider adjusting the sector and TRX configuration and the network layout.
Whether a cell is a repeater. With simpler functions than a BTS, a repeater is a
coverage extension device of a BTS. It is applied to widely-stretched areas or indoor
areas to solve the dead zone problem of BTS coverage. Using repeaters cannot increase the traffic capacity of a network but improve
the coverage only. Because the BTS coverage increases, however, the total traffic
improves accordingly.The setting of this parameter has effects on
handovers. Repeaters use the asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) due to a greater
distance between them. Therefore, handovers between repeaters are asynchronous.
Synchronous handovers will fail.
Whether to activate transmit diversity on the common channel of a 3G cell
0.5~4, step: 1/8 bit 4
0.5~4, step: 1/8 bit 4
0.5~4, step: 1/8 bit 4
N0, YES None N0
ms 3
Delay of transmit diversity when 16QAM is used. Generally, the parameter is applicable to general fading environments. The transmit diversity can generally bring a gain of 3 dB to 5 dB. The fading conditions vary with the MS location; therefore, MSs in a fixed time delay obtain different gains. In addition, the EDGE
service coding may be adversely affected. To avoid the preceding cases, the delay of
transmit diversity must be configurable and can be set for GMSK and 16QAM
respectively. Only the double-transceiver BTSs and the distributed BTSs can be
configured with this parameter. For the BTSs of other types, this parameter is set to an
invalid value 255.
Delay of transmit diversity when 32QAM is used. Generally, the parameter is applicable to general fading environments. The transmit diversity can generally bring a gain of 3 dB to 5 dB. The fading conditions vary with the MS location; therefore, MSs in a fixed time delay obtain different gains. In addition, the EDGE
service coding may be adversely affected. To avoid the preceding cases, the delay of
transmit diversity must be configurable and can be set for GMSK and 32QAM
respectively. Only the double-transceiver BTSs and the distributed BTSs can be
configured with this parameter. For the BTSs of other types, this parameter is set to an
invalid value 255.
Delay of transmit diversity when 8PSK is used. Generally, the parameter is applicable to general fading environments. The transmit diversity can generally bring a gain of 3 dB to 5 dB. The fading conditions vary with the MS location; therefore, MSs in a fixed time delay obtain different gains. In addition, the EDGE service coding may be adversely affected.
Therefore, the time delay of transmit diversity must be configurable and can be separately set for GMSK and 8PSK. Only the double-transceiver BTSs and the distributed BTSs
can be configured with this parameter. For the BTSs of other types, this parameter is set to
an invalid value 255.
Whether to support transmitting diversity or four diversity receiving
TCH:480~122400, step:480;
SDCCH:470~119850, step:470
Minimum interval between two consecutive downlink power control commands
1~30 dB 14
1~30 dB 14
1~30 dB 16
1~30 dB 16
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None UNSUPPORT Whether the cell supports DLDC
0~63 dB 20
1~10 None 3
1~30 dB 16
1~30 dB 16
0~127 None 0
If the downlink receive quality level of an AMR full rate call is greater than this parameter, the call needs to undergo Huawei power control
generation III.
If the downlink receive quality level of an AMR full rate call is smaller than this parameter, the call needs to undergo Huawei power control
generation III.
If the downlink receive quality level of an AMR half rate call is greater than this parameter,
the call needs to undergo Huawei power control generation III.
If the downlink receive quality level of an AMR half rate call is smaller than this parameter,
the call needs to undergo Huawei power control generation III.
Threshold for downlink edge handover. If the downlink receive level remains less than this
threshold for a period of time, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover algorithm is enabled, this threshold can be
decreased accordingly. If the PBGT handover algorithm is disabled, over-coverage, co-
channel interference, and adjacent channel interference may occur when this threshold is set improperly. In addition, to ensure uplink-downlink balance, this threshold needs to be
adjusted according to the handover performance statistics and actual network
performance.
Filter adjustment factor for downlink power control. Setting this parameter high helps to smooth the filtered values and to reduce the impact of poor measurement reports on the filtered values. Setting this parameter low
helps to draw the filtered values close to the actual values and to heighten the power
control effect.
Upper quality threshold for Huawei power control generation III on a full rate call. If the
downlink receive quality level of a full rate call is greater than this threshold, the call needs to undergo Huawei power control generation
III.
Lower quality threshold for Huawei power control generation III on a full rate call. If the
downlink receive quality level of a full rate call is smaller than this threshold, the call needs to undergo Huawei power control generation
III.
Expanded size of the GPRS RLC window. This parameter is used to expand the size of
the GRPS RLC window. The expanded window size breaks the restrictions of 64 defined in the protocol and reduces the
probability of GRPS RLC window stopping.
1~30 dB 18
1~30 dB 18
0~15 None 2
0~15 None 3
Upper quality threshold for Huawei power control generation III on a half rate call. If the downlink receive quality level of a half rate call is greater than this threshold, the call needs to undergo Huawei power control
generation III.
Lower quality threshold for Huawei power control generation III on a half rate call. If the downlink receive quality level of a half rate call is smallter than this threshold, the call needs to undergo Huawei power control
generation III.
Adjustment hysteresis 1 of AMR downlink coding rate (full rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the radio quality indication (RQI) in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically adjust the current
speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of coding rate is the
threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB,
and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the
active coding set (ACS). Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment hysteresis 2 of AMR downlink coding rate (full rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the radio quality indication (RQI) in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically adjust the current
speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of coding rate is the
threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB,
and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the
active coding set (ACS). Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
0~15 None 3
0~15 None 3
0~15 None 4
Adjustment hysteresis 3 of AMR downlink coding rate (full rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the radio quality indication (RQI) in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically adjust the current
speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of coding rate is the
threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB,
and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the
active coding set (ACS). Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment hysteresis 1 of AMR downlink coding rate (half rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the radio quality indication (RQI) in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically adjust the current
speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of coding rate is the
threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB,
and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the
active coding set (ACS). Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment hysteresis 2 of AMR downlink coding rate (half rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the radio quality indication (RQI) in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically adjust the current
speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of coding rate is the
threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB,
and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the
active coding set (ACS). Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
0~15 None 15
0~15 None 2
0~15 None 2
0~63 dB 35
Adjustment hysteresis 3 of AMR downlink coding rate (half rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the radio quality indication (RQI) in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically adjust the current
speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of coding rate is the
threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB,
and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the
active coding set (ACS). Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment hysteresis 1 of AMR downlink coding rate (wide band). According to a certain algorithm and the radio quality
indication (RQI) in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically
adjust the current speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of
coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call.
The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates
in the active coding set (ACS). Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an
adjustment hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment hysteresis 2 of AMR downlink coding rate (wide band). According to a certain algorithm and the radio quality
indication (RQI) in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically
adjust the current speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of
coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call.
The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates
in the active coding set (ACS). Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an
adjustment hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Threshold for determining whether downlink interference exists. If the downlink level is equal to or greater than "Interf.of DL Level Threshold" and the downlink quality level is
equal to or greater than "Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold", downlink interference exists.
The value range 0 to 63 is mapped to the range -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
0~70 None 40
ms 5
2~255 None 2
2~255 None 8
2~255 None 60
2~255 None 2
1~30 dB 4
1~30 dB 8
0~3 None 0
Threshold for determining whether downlink interference exists. If the downlink level is equal to or greater than "Interf.of DL Level Threshold" and the downlink quality level is
equal to or greater than "Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold", downlink interference exists.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging downlink signal strength. A single
measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately.
Therefore, the BSC needs to average the measured values in several successive measurement reports to reflect the radio
environment.
Lower voice quality threshold associated with the automatic adjustment of the AMR
downlink handover threshold. The value of this parameter must be smaller than or equal
to the value of Downlink Long-term FER Target.
Target value of the voice quality automatically adjusted through the downlink threshold of
AMR handover
Upper voice quality threshold associated with the automatic adjustment of the AMR
handover downlink threshold.
Factor of downlink threshold adjustment. It indicates the linear relation between the
threshold adjustment value and the logarithmic FER.
Maximum step by which to decrease downlink power according to signal strength
Maximum step by which to increase downlink power according to signal strength
Number of downlink measurement reports that the BSC predicts. The BSC takes a while to confirm the power control effect of a power
control command. Thus, the BSC makes a power control decision based on a
measurement report that lags behind the changes in the receive level and quality instead of reflecting the real-time radio
environment. As a result, the power control is late.
To prevent late power control to a certain degree, the power control algorithm involves a measurement report prediction filter. The
BSC can sample several downlink measurement reports in a short time and then weigh them to predict future N measurement
reports.This parameter specifies the number N.
0~7 None 0
0~7 None 2
ms 5
0~7 None 2
0~63 dB 10
0~70 None 55
0~70 None 60
Quality level threshold for decreasing downlink signal power. If the BTS transmits
signals at a quality level less than this threshold, the BSC decreases the power of the BTS. If (downlink receive level - "MAX
Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.") < "DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold", the BSC does not
adjust the transmit power.
Quality level threshold for increasing downlink signal power. If the BTS transmits signals at a
quality level greater than this threshold, the BSC increases the power of the BTS. If
(downlink receive level + "MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.") > "DL RX_LEV Upper
Threshold", the BSC does not adjust the transmit power.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging downlink signal quality. A single
measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately.
Therefore, the BSC needs to average the measured values in several successive measurement reports to reflect the radio
environment.
During downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality level is equal to or greater than "DL Qual, bad Trig Threshold", "DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" is increased by "DL Qual.
Bad UpLEVDiff" to further increase the expected downlink power level.
During downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality level is equal to or greater than "DL Qual, bad Trig Threshold", "DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" is increased by "DL Qual.
Bad UpLEVDiff" to further increase the expected downlink power level.
Downlink quality threshold for emergency handover. This parameter is represented as
the product of 10 and a quality level that ranges from 0 to 7. The emergency handover
can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of an MS is greater(indicate
bad quality) than this threshold.
Downlink quality limit for emergency handover in an AMR full rate call. The value of this parameter corresponds to the quality
levels (0 to 7) multiplied by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the
downlink reception quality of an MS is higher than the value of this parameter, which
indicates a poor quality.
0~70 None 55
0~10 None 3
ms 3
0~63 dB 20
0~63 dB 20
ms 1
0~10 None 6
ms 3
Downlink quality limit for emergency handover in an AMR half rate call. The value of this parameter corresponds to the quality
levels (0 to 7) multiplied by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the
downlink reception quality of an MS is higher than the value of this parameter, which
indicates a poor quality.
This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength factor multiplied by 10 during the
calculation of the downlink power control step. The downlink signal strength factor is a
coefficient indicating how much the signal strength is considered during the calculation
of the downlink power control step.
TCH:0~9120, step:480; SDCCH:0~8930, step:470
Length of the exponential filter for downlink signal strength. A single measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately. Therefore, the BSC needs to filter the measured values in several successive
measurement reports to reflect the radio environment.
Upper receive level threshold for downlink power control. If the downlink receive level is greater than this threshold, the power of the
downlink signal needs to be decreased.
Lower receive level threshold for downlink power control. If the downlink receive level is smaller than this threshold, the power of the
uplink signal needs to be increased.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
Length of the slide window filter for downlink signal strength. A single measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately. Therefore, the BSC needs to filter the measured values in several successive
measurement reports to reflect the radio environment.
This parameter specifies the downlink quality level factor multiplied by 10 during the
calculation of the downlink power control step. The downlink quality level factor is a
coefficient indicating how much the quality level is considered during the calculation of
the downlink power control step.
TCH:0~9120, step:480; SDCCH:0~8930, step:470
Length of the exponential filter for downlink signal quality. A single measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately. Therefore, the BSC needs to filter the measured values in several successive
measurement reports to reflect the radio environment.
ms 1
0~100 None 5
0~100 None 55
0~63 dB 45
0~63 dB 28
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
Length of the slide window filter for downlink signal quality. A single measurement report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately. Therefore, the BSC needs to filter the measured values in several successive
measurement reports to reflect the radio environment.
A power control step cannot exceed the step computed according to "III DL RexLev Protect Factor" and "III DL RexQual Protect Factor".
A power control step cannot exceed the step computed according to "III DL RexLev Protect Factor" and "III DL RexQual Protect Factor".
Upper threshold for downlink signal strengthIf the downlink received signal level is greater
than this threshold, a power decrease is computed. Then, the power is decreased by the least of the power decrease, maximum
power adjustment step allowed by the quality zone to which the received signal quality
belongs, and "MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.".
Power decrease = downlink received signal level - ("DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" + "AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold")/2
The maximum power adjustment step allowed by the quality zone is chosen from "MAX
Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0", "MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1", and "MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2" according to the
quality zone.
Lower threshold for downlink signal strengthIf the downlink received signal level is less
than this threshold, a power increase is computed. Then, the power is increased by
the least of the power increase, "MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV", and "MAX Up Adj. PC
Value by Qual.".Power increase = ("DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" + "AMR DL RX_LEV Lower
Threshold")/2 - downlink received signal level
0~300 ms 140
0~255 s 0 Interval for resending downlink test messages
1~255 None 5
0~63 dB 12
0~63 dB 17
Time interval between sending of the Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message and setup of the DL TBF. After receiving the Packet Uplink
Ack/Nack message (FAI = 1), the MS releases the UL TBF and starts to monitor CCCH. In this case, if the MS receives the
downlink assignment message before being handed over to the CCCH, the MS fails to
respond to the downlink assignment message. Therefore, a delay is required for
establishing DL TBF, to avoid such a situation. That is, the DL TBF will not be set
up immediately after the Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message (FAI = 1) is sent. In this way, the MS can respond to the downlink
assignment message properly.
Number of times of the BSC6900 resending downlink test messages after the downlink
test function is enabled. If the BSC6900 does not receive any response message from the
MS at the preset interval, the BSC6900 releases the relevant voice group call service
(VGCS) channel.
Adjustment threshold 1 of AMR downlink coding rate (full rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the RQI in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS
automatically adjust the current speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment
threshold of coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the ACS. Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment threshold 2 of AMR downlink coding rate (full rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the RQI in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS
automatically adjust the current speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment
threshold of coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the ACS. Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
0~63 dB 25
0~63 dB 23
0~63 dB 31
0~63 dB 63
Adjustment threshold 3 of AMR downlink coding rate (full rate). The adjustment
thresholds and the hysteresis of coding rate must meet the following conditions: AMR
Coding Rate adj.th (n) < AMR Coding Rate adj.th (n + 1), n = 1 or 2; [AMR Coding Rate adj.th (n) + AMR Coding Rate adj.hyst (n)] <
[AMR Coding Rate adj.th (n + 1) + AMR Coding Rate adj.hyst (n + 1)], n = 1 or 2.
Adjustment threshold 1 of AMR downlink coding rate (half rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the RQI in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS
automatically adjust the current speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment
threshold of coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the ACS. Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment threshold 2 of AMR downlink coding rate (half rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the RQI in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS
automatically adjust the current speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment
threshold of coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the ACS. Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment threshold 3 of AMR downlink coding rate (half rate). According to a certain
algorithm and the RQI in the call measurement report, the MS and the BTS
automatically adjust the current speech coding and decoding rate. The adjustment
threshold of coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the ACS. Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
0~63 dB 12
0~63 dB 18
0~255 None None
0~255 None None
0~255 None None
CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4 None CS2
None MCS6
Adjustment threshold 1 of AMR downlink coding rate (wide band). According to a certain algorithm and the RQI in the call
measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically adjust the current speech
coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the ACS. Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
Adjustment threshold 2 of AMR downlink coding rate (wide band). According to a certain algorithm and the RQI in the call
measurement report, the MS and the BTS automatically adjust the current speech
coding and decoding rate. The adjustment threshold of coding rate is the threshold of the RQI, which is the carrier-to-interference ratio of a call. The RQI value 1 means 0.5 dB, the RQI value 2 means 1 dB, and others can be deducted by analogy. There may be multiple coding rates in the ACS. Therefore, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment
hysteresis between every two adjacent coding rates.
MDU board number when the antenna pass of downlink tributary A is selected
MDU board number when the antenna pass of downlink tributary B is selected
Clock domain required by the slave side in the 1588V2 protocol. This parameter is valid
when the 1588CLK type is configured.
Coding scheme of the default GPRS downlink. Dynamic adjustment coding: the coding scheme used during initial access
transmission. If the downlink uses the fixed coding scheme, the TBF uses the fixed
Fixed coding scheme that is used on the downlink EGPRS2-A link. If the downlink uses the fixed coding scheme, this parameter can be set MSC1-4, MSC7-8 or DAS5-12.. If the downlink uses the dynamic coding scheme,
this parameter is set to UNFIXED.
CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, UNFIXED
Adjustment mode of the downlink GPRS link coding scheme. If the fixed coding scheme is used, this parameter is set to a value ranging
from CS1 to CS4. If the dynamic coding scheme is used, this parameter is set to
Coding scheme of the downlink EDGE link. If the downlink uses the fixed coding scheme, this parameter is set to a value ranging from
MCS1 to MCS9. If the downlink uses the dynamic adjustment coding scheme, this
parameter is set to UNFIXED.
Whether to prohibit sending point-to-point short messages. If necessary, this parameter
is used for controlling whether to send downlink short messages from a specific cell
so as to ensure sufficient radio channel resources for normal calls.
0~5000 ms 2400
0~64 per cent 10
0~64 per cent 5
0~64 per cent 5
0~64 per cent 5
0~64 per cent 2
Delay of releasing the downlink TBF. After the last downlink RLC data block is transmitted on the network side and all the transmitted
downlink data blocks are received, the MS is not informed to stop this downlink TBF.
Instead, the state of the last data block is forcibly set to "not received" and the RRBP flag of the last data block is retransmitted
continuously so that the downlink TBF is not released. During the downlink delay release, if the upper layer of the network side needs to
transmit downlink data, the downlink RLC block for unpacking can be transmitted in the downlink TBF for delay release. The state of
the downlink TBF is changed from delay releasing to downlink transmitting. In addition, the MS must respond to the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message through the uplink data block of the RRBP to exchange messages
with the network side. When the MS needs to send data, the MS can send the uplink
request to the network sides through the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack with the channel request description. If this parameter is set to
0, the release delay of downlink TBF is disabled.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the downlink TBF is changed from
CS2 to CS1. When the downlink TBF retransmission rate is greater than or equals to this value, the coding mode of the TBF is
changed from CS2 to CS1.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the TBF is changed from CS3 to
CS2. When the TBF retransmission rate is greater than or equals to this value, the
coding mode of the TBF is changed from CS3 to CS2.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the downlink TBF is changed from
CS4 to CS3. When the downlink TBF Retransmission rate is greater than or equals to this value, the coding mode of the TBF is
changed from CS4 to CS3.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the downlink TBF is changed from CS1 to CS2. When the TBF retransmission rate is less than or equals to this value, the
coding mode of the TBF is changed from CS1 to CS2.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the TBF is changed from CS2 to
CS3. When the downlink TBF retransmission rate is less than or equals to CS2 to CS1, the coding mode of the TBF is changed from CS2
to CS3.
0~64 per cent 2
0~25.5, step:0.1 dB 30
0~128 dB 72
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the downlink TBF is changed from
CS3 to CS4. When the downlink TBF retransmission rate is less than or equals to this value, the coding mode of the downlink
TBF is changed from CS3 to CS4.
Dual-antenna gain used to estimate the downlink power during assignment
Maximum signal level difference between the neighbor cell and the serving cell for
triggering directed retry
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from Abis territorial link fault. The value 0
means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call
drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from connection failure (handover access
failure). The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this
parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of
call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from connection failure, operation and
maintenance (OM) intervention. The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize".
If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from a connection failure except for handover
access failure, OM intervention, radio link failure, and unavailability of radio resources. The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means
"not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are
not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from connection failure (radio link failure). The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from connection failure (unavailability of radio
resources). The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops resulting
from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from equipment fault. The value 0 means
"optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops
resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from error indication (unsolicited DM
response). The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this
parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of
call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from error indication (sequence error). The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from error indication (T200 timeout). The
value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from forced handover failure. The value 0
means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call
drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from incoming-BSC handover timeout. The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from outgoing internal inter-cell handover
timeout. The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this
parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of
call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from intra-cell handover timeout. The value 0
means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call
drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from no MS measurement reports for a long time. The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this
parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of
call drops.
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
0~1 None 1
1~60 min 10
0~12 h 3
2~10 dB 2
NO, YES None YES
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from outgoing-BSC handover timeout. The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from release indications. The value 0 means "optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops
resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
Whether to optimize the call drops resulting from resource check. The value 0 means
"optimize" and 1 means "not optimize". If the value of this parameter is 0, the call drops
resulting from this cause are not brought into the statistics of call drops.
This parameter specifies the interval at which the power of a TRX is continually decreased.
This parameter specifies the delay time before decreasing the power of the TRXs.
This parameter specifies the step by which the power of a TRX is decreased at a time.
Whether to support the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX). To reduce the power consumption, the DRX is introduced into the GSM Specification. MSs supporting the DRX can consume less power to receive
interested broadcast messages. This prolongs the service time of MS batteries.
BSCs supporting the DRX must send scheduling messages to MSs so that the MSs
can use the DRX function. The period occupied by broadcast messages that are
contained in a scheduling message is called a scheduling period. In the sending sequence, a scheduling message contain the description
of each short message to be broadcasted and the position of each broadcast message in the
scheduling period.
0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 s 4
INACTIVE, ACTIVE None INACTIVE
0~63 None 0
0~100 per cent 85
NO, YES None YES
OFF, ON None OFF
FULL, HALF None FULL
Duration of the timer for entering the DRX mode. DRX is the parameter in the cell broadcast message. It indicates non-
continuous receiving mode. When the MS is switched from the packet transmission mode to the idle mode, the MS needs to maintain
the none DRX mode for a moment. After the TBF is released, in the period when the MS is
in non-DRX mode, the MS monitors all the CCCH blocks and the BSC stores the context
of the MS. The reservation duration is determined by the minimum value of
DRX_Timer_Max and NON_DRX_TIMER. The parameter NON_DRX_TIMER is
negotiated with the SGSN during GPRS attaching of the MS. Normally, this value is
greater than that of DRX_TIMER_MAX. Therefore, the value of DRX_TIMER_MAX is
used. 0: switch to the DRX mode immediately;
1: switch to the DRX mode in one second.Value n indicates that the MS enters the DRX
mode n seconds later.
Whether to start the dehumidification equipment of the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
DSCP to be contained in the header of an IP packet. According to this parameter, the router provides differentiated services for
packet streams. If this parameter is greater, the service level is higher. This parameter is valid only when the transport type is set to IP.
Threshold of the load in the target cell for the directed retry. Only a cell whose load is lower than or equal to this threshold can be selected
as a candicate target cell.
Type of the DRX supporting the VGCS service. An MS reads the NCH only when a
new notification message of group call arrives. This helps save power of the MS. This parameter is mandatory for a SAGEM
MS.
Whether a BTS randomizes the dummy bits in all the signaling messages that the BTS sends to an MS. That is, dummy bits are
randomized rather than filled on the basis of 0x2B.
The duplex mode of FE port is duplex or half-duplex.
10~80 None 20
0~2047 None None
10~3600 s 20
None LEVEL0
0~8 None 2
NO, YES None YES
None NOTSUPPORT
0~31 None None
E1, T1 None None
0~49 dB 3
Downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. When the subscriber number on the channel reaches the value
(threshold/10), the dynamic channel conversion is triggered. We recommand that the value of "Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion" should be less
than "PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold" for triggering converting dynamic channel in
time and reducing PDCH multiplex.
Number of a DXX. It is unique in one BSC6900 and uniquely identifies a DXX.
Time to wait for releasing the dynamic channel after the TBF on the dynamic
channel is released. When all the TBFs on the channel are released, the dynamic
channel is not released at once. Instead, the timer is started when the channels are idle.
Before the timer expires, if new service request is received, the dynamic channel is
still occupied and timer is stopped; otherwise, the dynamic channel is released after the
timer expired.
LEVEL0, LEVEL1, LEVEL2
Mode of preempting the dynamic channel for the CS domain and PS domain. Only the
channel configured in the TCH/F mode can be preempted.
"Preempt all dynamic TCHFs" indicates the circuit domain can preempt all the dynamic
channels."No preempt of CCHs" indicates the circuit
domain can preempt all the dynamic channels except the CCHs.
"No preempt of service TCHF" indicates the circuit domain cannot preempt all the dynamic
channels of bearer services.
Number of full-rate TCHs reserved for the CS domain. This parameter is valid only when
"Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel" is set to LEVEL1 or LEVEL2.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the BSC6900 to enable the TRX Intelligent
Shutdown feature on a cell.
NOTSUPPORT, DDIVERSITY, DPBT
Whether to enable the cell to support dynamic transmit diversity or dynamic PBT
Number of the E1 port on the BTS connected to the BSC.
Type of the E1/T1 from which the BTS extracts the transport clock. This parameter is
valid only when the clock type is set to IP_TRANSFER.
As a performance counter for 3G cells, Ec/No indicates the ratio of the energy per received
chip to the spectral noise power density.If the Ec/No of a 3G neighbor cell is greater than "HOECNOTH3G" plus this parameter,
the neighbor cell is listed in the candidate cell queue.
0~49 dB 30
NO, YES None YES
1~255 s 4
1~255 s 5
Threshold for determining the layer of the 3G neighbor cell. If the Ec/No of the 3G neighbor cell is less than this threshold, the neighbor
cell is set to the lowest layer (layer 5).
The early classmark sending control (ECSC) parameter specifies whether the MSs in a cell
use early classmark sending. After a successful immediate assignment, the MS
sends additional classmark information to the network as early as possible. The additional classmark information mainly contains the CM3 (classmark 3) information. The CM3
(classmark 3) information contains the frequency band support capability of the MS (used for the future channel assignment),
power information about each frequency band supported by the MS (used for the handover
between different frequency bands), and encryption capability of the MS.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover between the subcells of an
enhanced dual-frequency network are met during P of N measurements, the handover is
triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover between the subcells of an
enhanced dual-frequency network are met during P of N measurements, the handover is
triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
0~11 None 10
NO, YES None NO Whether the current cell supports EDGE
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 6
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 1
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 1
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 6
due to low or high load in the underlaid subcell is not allowed. System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based
on message packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the
current flux control level of the system.
0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 indicates
the highest level.
The handover performed over the maximum threshold may have tremendous impacts on the system. Thus, this parameter should not be set to a higher value. 1) The flow control
level algorithm for the assigned system messages: [(Average Message Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold)/(Inner
Flow Control Discard All Threshold - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold) x
100]/10+1 (round-down for division operation). If the value is smaller than Inner
Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, Level 0 is used. If the value is equal to or greater
than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the level is calculated. The value
range is from 0 to 11.
2) Flow control threshold for the CPU to start to discard the channel access messages and
paging messages: 80%
. Flow control threshold for the CPU to discard all channel access messages and
paging messages: 100%
. CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to or greater than CPU flow control threshold 80% corresponds
According to the P/N rule, if a neighbor cell meets the conditions for selecting the
neighbor cell for edge handover in P of N measurement reports, the edge handover to
the neighbor cell is triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
According to the P/N rule, if a neighbor cell meets the conditions for selecting the
neighbor cell for edge handover in P of N measurement reports, the edge handover to
the neighbor cell is triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for edge handover are met in P of N
measurement reports, the handover is triggered.
This parameter specifies the number P.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for edge handover are met for P seconds within
N seconds, the handover is triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for edge handover are met in P of N
measurement reports, the handover is triggered.
This parameter specifies the number N.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for edge handover are met for P seconds within
N seconds, the handover is triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO Whether the current cell supports EGPRS2-A
0~31 None 16
0~31 None 7
1~15 None 15
NO, YES None NO
None Priority4
NO, YES None NO
Whether to support the 11-bit EGPRS access request
Used for EDGE 8PSK transmission quality statistics. If MEAN_BEP is less than or equals
to this threshold, the transmission quality is regarded to be deteriorated. MEAN_BEP
indicates the average error code rate in one measurement report period.
Used for EDGE GMSK transmission quality statistics. If MEAN_BEP is less than or equals
to this threshold, the transmission quality is regarded deteriorated. MEAN_BEP indicates
the average error code rate in one measurement report period.
Priority level of an emergency call. If this parameter is set to 15, the functions of
reserving TCHs for emergency calls and preempting TCHs are not enabled. If the two
functions need to be enabled, set this parameter to a value from 1 to 14. If the value of "Emergency Call Preemption Permitted" is ON, this parameter can also be used for TCH preemption. The value 1 means the highest
priority and 14 means the lowest.
Whether to allow the function of enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption
(eMLPP). With the eMLPP function enabled, the network can use different policies such as queuing, preemption, or directed retry based
on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied. If this
parameter is set to YES, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest priority
initiates a handover, and the MS with a higher priority seizes the idle channel after a
handover. If this parameter is set to NO, an MS with a lower priority releases the channel,
the MS with a higher priority seizes the idle channel after the release.
The eMLPP has up to seven priorities: A, B, 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. The two highest priorities A and B are internally reserved for local use only. Priorities 0 to 4 can be subscribed by
MSs for global use. With the support of the MSC, HLR, and
mobile terminal (containing a SIM card), the eMLPP function can be perfectly
Indicating whether the eMLPP function is enabled in a cell and indicating the eMLPP
priority of the cell. From high to low, the priorities are A, B, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and No Priority.
No Priority is the lowest.
Whether to enable the fallback function for the BTS
None
-99.0~40.0 (step: 0.1) degree Celsius 0
0~100 per cent 70
OFF, ON None OFF
OFF, ON None ON
A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, A5/7
A5/0-1&A5/1-0&A5/2-0&A5/3-0&A5/4-0&A5/5-
0&A5/6-0&A5/7-0
Encryption algorithm supported by the BSS side
If the ambient temperature reaches the value of this parameter, the heater is shut down.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
If the load of the underlaid subcell is greater than this threshold, certain calls in the
underlaid subcell are handed over to the overlaid subcell to balance the traffic between
the overlaid and underlaid subcells.
Whether to support PS downlink MAC back pressures in GSM. When the buffer is
overflowed, the L2 transmission rate is limited if "User Plane DL Flow Ctrl Switch" is "ON". Thus, the data blocks are not lost. If "User
Plane DL Flow Ctrl Switch" is "OFF", the L2 transmission rate is not limited. In this case,
the loss of data blocks may occur. When "User Plane DL Flow Ctrl Switch" is set to
"ON", the LDR needs to be disabled through the "SET LDR" command.
Whether to enable the enhanced concentric cell algorithm in a concentric cell.
If a cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, when an overlaid-to-underlaid handover or an underlaid-to-overlaid
handover is decided, the MS compares the receive level value respectively with the
values of "OtoU HO Received Level Threshold" and "UtoO HO Received Level
Threshold" in "SET GCELLHOIUO" to decide whether to trigger an enhanced concentric
cell handover.If the cell does not support the enhanced
concentric cell function, the MS compares the actual receive level value with the threshold of
receive level to decide whether to trigger a concentric cell handover. In addition, when an underlaid-to-overlaid handover is decided, the
underlay cell load is considered.
1~255 s 5
0~63 dB 5
0~100 per cent 20
0~100 per cent 80
NO, YES None YES
0~63 dB 63
NO, YES None NO
500~60000 ms 3000
0~255 s 0
If all the calls in the overlaid subcell are handed over to the underlaid subcell when the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid subcell
is less than "En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Thred", the BSC load increases sharply. In
this case, the target subcell may be congested and drop calls. To avoid such a
problem, the hierarchical load-based handover algorithm is used to hand over the
calls from the overlaid subcell to the underlaid cell level by level.
This parameter specifies the period of the handover at each hierarchy level.
Signal level step for the hierarchical load-based handover from the overlaid subcell to
the underlaid subcell
If the load of the underlaid subcell is less than this threshold, certain calls in the overlaid subcell are handed over to the underlaid subcell to balance the traffic between the
overlaid and underlaid subcells.
If the load of the underlaid subcell is greater than this threshold, the period of the load-
based handover from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell, "UL Subcell Load
Hierarchical HO Periods", is decreased by "MOD Step LEN of UL Load HO Period"
every second to accelerate the handover.
Whether to enable the cell to centralize two busy half rate TCHs in different timeslots into
one timeslot through handover and then to combine the two idle half rate TCHs in the
other timeslot into one full rate TCH dynamically
Initial signal level used to compute the handover zone for an MS during the
hierarchical load-based handover from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell of the
enhanced concentric cell
Whether to disable emergency calls. For the MSs of access levels 0 to 9, if the value of this parameter is NO, emergency calls are
enabled. For the MSs of access levels 11 to 15, emergency calls are disabled only when the relevant access control bit is set to 0 and
this parameter is set to YES.
Timer for the BSC waiting for an Establish Indication message after sending an
Immediate Assignment message. If T3101 expires before the BSC receives an Establish
Indication message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.
When the OML is switched to a port where the connection is successfully established, the switchover cannot be performed over a certain period of time, which is specified as ring II rotating penalty time. In this manner,
frequent switchover between the ports due to intermittent blinking can be avoided.
None None
NoExclusive, Exclusive None NoExclusive
0~100 per cent None
0~63 dB 30
0~63 dB 30
CLOSE, OPEN None CLOSE
EM0, EM1 None EM0
s 60sec
1970-1-1 00:00:00~2538-12-31 23:59:59
End date and time of a broadcast message. This is a key parameter for identifying a
simple cell broadcast message. You can use "DSP GSMSCB" to query and obtain the
value of this parameter.
Whether it is a SoLSA exclusive access cell. If it is a SoLSA exclusive access cell, only the
MS subscribing the Localised Service Area (LSA) can access this cell.
Threshold for the rate of the number of bad frames to the total number of TRAU frames. If
the bad frame rate exceeds this threshold within the "Period of Mute Detection Class1", mute speech may be detected. The setting of "Mute Detection Class 2 Switch" determines
whether to perform the class-2 mute detection.
Received signal strength at an MS expected in power forecast, which helps to compute the
initial transmit power of the BTS
Received signal strength at the BTS expected in power forecast, which helps to compute the
initial transmit power of an MS
Whether to support the downlink throughput enhancement function of the dual timeslot
cell. When this switch is turned on, the system can allocate the packet downlink
channel of the odd number timeslot of dual timeslot bearer of the dual timeslot cell.
Whether the network requires an MS to send an extension measurement report
60sec, 120sec, 240sec, 480sec, 960sec, 1920sec,
3840sec, 7680sec
Time interval between two extension measurement reports
TYPE1, TYPE2, TYPE3 None TYPE1
None Normal_cell
SEND, NOTSEND None SEND
0~12750, step: 50 ms 8
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
OFF, ON None None Activation factor switch
Type of an extension measurement report.There are three types of extension
measurement reports: type 1, type 2, and type 3.
Type 1: No matter whether the BSIC was decoded, the MS sends the network a
measurement report on the six strongest TRXs. The measurement report contains the received signal level and the decoded BSIC.
Type 2: The MS sends the network a measurement report on the six strongest
TRXs. For the six carriers, the BSIC must be decoded successfully and the NCC specified
by NCC_PERMITTED is carried. The measurement report contains the received
signal level and the decoded BSIC.Type 3: The MS does not need to decode the
BSIC for the TRXs that the measurement report concerns. The measurement report contains the received signal level and the interference measurement of one of the
concerned TRXs.
Normal_cell, DualTst_ExtCell
Whether a cell is an extension cell.A double-timeslot extension cell regards an
additional TDMA frame as access delay extension. In theory, the supported TA value
is 219, that is, a time delay of about 120 kilometers.
Whether to send the Dummy message during the deactivated period of the extended uplink
TBF
Interval of sending a paging message or notification message on the FACCH.
Messages on the FACCH are sent in the mode of speech frame stealing. A large
number of consecutive stolen speech frames may affect the voice quality and even lead to no voice. Therefore, the BTS must control the
time interval of sending a paging or notification message on the FACCH for the purpose of reducing the impact on the voice
quality.
Whether to allow sending notification messages on the FACCH. If the value of this parameter is YES, an MS engaged in a point-
to-point call can receive a notification message for a group call. You can interrupt
the existing call and join the group call.
Whether to allow sending paging messages on the FACCH. If the value of this parameter is YES, an MS can receive a paging message on the group call channel. You can leave the
group call and respond to the paging message.
OFF, ON None OFF
0~63 dB 30
0~100 per cent 0
NO, YES None NO
CLOSE, OPEN None CLOSE
0~100 per cent 55
0~100 per cent 85
43.2~57.5 (step: 0.1) V 535
AUTO, MANU None None
If this parameter is set to ON, the BSC assigns the channels in the TRXs of the cell
in a polling manner. Therefore, each TRX has an even chance to be used. In this way, the
connection between the TRX and the RF can be checked without manual dialing tests.
Penalty signal level imposed on a target cell to which the handover fails due to congestion
or poor radio quality. This penalty helps to prevent the MS from making a second
handover attempt to the target cell.
After a channel request message is received, the type of the channel needs to be specified. In this case, if the threshold of the load on the
TCH in the current cell is smaller than the Fast Call Setup TCH Usage Threshold and the request message is not issued during
location update or paging, a TCH is preferentially assigned.
Ring II function switch. The parameter should be set to "YES" when the ring II function is
enabled.
If the parameter is set to "YES", it indicates that some data packets are discarded to
ensure the basic functions of the BTS are not affected when the FE port is overloaded. After the port is not overloaded, the flow control is
stopped.
Threshold for stopping RSL flow control. If the occupancy of the LAPD queue is less than
this threshold, the BSC6900 stops flow control.
Threshold for starting RSL flow control. If the occupancy of the LAPD queue is greater than
this threshold, the BSC6900 starts flow control.
Float charging voltage. Float charging compensates the discharged capacity of the battery so that the battery can be charged to
full voltage indefinitely. The value of this parameter is slightly lower than the even
charging voltage. See the vendor specification for the setting of this parameter.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Input mode of the BA lists.AUTO: In this mode, the system fills in the
BA1 and BA2 lists according to neighboring relations of cells.
MANU: In this mode, you can maintain the BA tables by yourself. If the neighboring relations
of cells are changed, for example, after a neighboring cell is added or deleted, you must
maintain the BA1 and BA2 lists by yourself.
AUTO, MANU None None
0~42, step: 6 dB 0
dB 0
0~1 None None
0~16383 None None
0~49 dB 10 Minimum Ec/No of the 3G FDD cell candidate
0~3 None 2
This parameter indicate whether to generate the FDD BA2 table automatically according to
neighbor cell relations or to input the FDD BA2 table manually
Offset of a FDD cell report.When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, the value of this parameter be added to the
receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report.
The values of this parameter correspond to the following decibel values:
0: 0 dB1: 6 dB
...7: 42 dB
0~36, Positive infinity, step: 6
Threshold of a FDD cell report.When the receive level value in the
measurement report of a 3G cell exceeds the value of this parameter, the measurement
report takes effect. After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell
joins the cell priority sequence.The values of this parameter correspond to
the following decibel values:0: 0 dB1: 6 dB
...6: 36 dB
7: positive infinity
Diversity indication of a 3G cell. This parameter indicates whether the transmit
diversity mode on the common channel in a cell is activated.0 means No,1 means Yes.
Downlink frequency number that an MS in the connected mode retrieves from the 3G
neighboring cell list. The numbers are sent through system message 2QUATER/MI. The value ranges of frequency numbers vary with
corresponding band reporting.
Number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be included in measurement report
dB 0
0~7 dB 0
-20, -6, -18, -8, -16, -10, -14, -12
This parameter specifies one of the parameters for FDD cell reselection.
A FDD cell becomes a candidate cell if all the following conditions are met for five
consecutive seconds: 1.Receive level of the FDD cell > Average receive level of the current serving cell +
"FDD Q offset";The FDD cell meets the following condition in the case of any neighboring 2G cell: Receive level of the FDD cell > Receive level of any
neighboring 2G cell + "FDD Q offset";2. Ec/No of the FDD cell > "FDD Qmin" -
"FDD Qmin Offset";3. Receive level of the FDD cell > "RSCP
Threshold";If multiple FDD cells meet the preceding
conditions, the MS reselects the cell with the strongest receive level.
See 3GPP TSs 45.008 and 25.304.The values of this parameter correspond to
Offset of the minimum threshold for Ec/No during a FDD cell reselection.
A FDD cell becomes a candidate cell if all the following conditions are met for five
consecutive seconds: 1.Receive level of the FDD cell > Average receive level of the current serving cell +
"FDD Q offset";The FDD cell meets the following condition in the case of any neighboring 2G cell: Receive level of the FDD cell > Receive level of any
neighboring 2G cell + "FDD Q offset";2. Ec/No of the FDD cell > "FDD Qmin" -
"FDD Qmin Offset";3. Receive level of the FDD cell > "RSCP
Threshold";If multiple FDD cells meet the preceding
conditions, the MS reselects the cell with the strongest receive level.
See 3GPP TSs 45.008 and 25.304.
dB 8
RSCP, EcN0 None RSCP
-114~-84, step: 2 dBm 6
0~63 None 10 Minimum RSCP of the 3G FDD cell candidate
Negative infinity, -28~28, step: 4
This parameter specifies one of the thresholds of the signal level for 3G cell
reselection.A FDD cell becomes a candidate cell if all the
following conditions are met for five consecutive seconds:
1.Receive level of the FDD cell > Average receive level of the current serving cell +
"FDD Q offset";The FDD cell meets the following condition in the case of any neighboring 2G cell: Receive level of the FDD cell > Receive level of any
neighboring 2G cell + "FDD Q offset";2. Ec/No of the FDD cell > "FDD Qmin" -
"FDD Qmin Offset";3. Receive level of the FDD cell > "RSCP
Threshold";If multiple FDD cells meet the preceding
conditions, the MS reselects the cell with the strongest receive level.
See 3GPP TSs 45.008 and 25.304.The values of this parameter correspond to
the following decibel values:0: - (always select a cell if acceptable)
1: -28 dB,2: -24 dB,
...15: 28 dB.
This parameter specifies whether Ec/No or RSCP is used for the measurement report on a FDD cell. Ec/No stands for the signal-to-noise ratio. RSCP stands for the received
signal code power.
Minimum level threshold of UTRAN cell reselection. During the cell reselection
decision from a GSM cell to a FDD cell, this parameter is used to calculate the RSCP
threshold of the target cell. A FDD cell becomes a candidate cell if
all the following conditions are met for five consecutive seconds:
1.Receive level of the FDD cell > Average receive level of the current serving cell +
"FDD Q offset";The FDD cell meets the following condition in the case of any neighboring 2G cell: Receive level of the FDD cell > Receive level of any
neighboring 2G cell + "FDD Q offset";2. Ec/No of the FDD cell > "FDD Qmin" -
"FDD Qmin Offset";3. Receive level of the FDD cell > "RSCP
Threshold";If multiple FDD cells meet the preceding
conditions, the MS reselects the cell with the strongest receive level.
See 3GPP TSs 45.008 and 25.304.The values of this parameter correspond to
the following decibel values: 0 = -114 dBm, 1 = -112 dBm, 2 = -110 dBm,
...14 = -86 dBm, 15 = -84 dBm.
0~511 None None
NO, YES None NO
0~1000 per mill 2
0~1000 per mill 4
0~1000 per mill 8
0~1000 per mill 16
0~1000 per mill 32
0~1000 per mill 64
0~1000 per mill 128
Scrambling code of a 3G cell, used for distinguishing MSs or cells. Scrambling codes
are used after spreading. Therefore, the bandwidth of a signal is not changed. Instead,
signals from different sources are differentiated. Scrambling prevents multiple transmitters from using the same code word
for spreading.On the uplink, the scrambling function is used for differentiating MSs. On the downlink, the
function is used for differentiating cells.
Whether the BTS reports the frame erase ratio in a measurement report or
preprocessed measurement report
If the FER carried in the measurement report (MR) received is lower than or equal to "FER threshold 1", the value of "FER 0 and Quality Level N" is incremented by one. If the FER in
the MR received is greater than "FER threshold 1" but meanwhile lower than or
equal to "FER threshold 2", the value of "FER 1 and Quality Level N" is incremented by one.
If the FER carried in the MR received is greater than "FER threshold 2" but meanwhile
lower than "FER threshold 3", the value of "FER 2 and Quality Level N" is incremented
by one.
If the FER carried in the MR received is greater than "FER threshold 3" but meanwhile
lower than "FER threshold 4", the value of "FER 3 and Quality Level N" is incremented
by one.
If the FER carried in the MR received is greater than "FER threshold 4" but meanwhile
lower than "FER threshold 5", the value of "FER 4 and Quality Level N" is incremented
by one.
If the FER carried in the MR received is greater than "FER threshold 5" but meanwhile
lower than "FER threshold 6", the value of "FER 5 and Quality Level N" is incremented
by one.
If the FER carried in the MR received is greater than "FER threshold 6" but meanwhile
lower than "FER threshold 7", the value of "FER 6 and Quality Level N" is incremented
by one.
If the FER carried in the MR received is greater than "FER threshold 7", the value of "FER 7 and Quality Level N" is incremented
by one.
None NO_FH
0~32 None 6
NO, YES None NO
INACTIVE, ACTIVE None INACTIVE
0~100 per cent 80
DISABLE, ENABLE None ENABLE
NO_FH, BaseBand_FH, RF_FH, Hybrid_FH
This parameter specifies the frequency hopping mode of a cell. When this parameter is set to "NO_FH", all the TRXs of the cell do
not join in frequency hopping. When this parameter is set to "BaseBand_FH", the cell is in baseband frequency hopping mode. In this case, there can be TRXs that do not join in frequency hopping on the cell. When this
parameter is set to "RF_FH", the cell is in RF frequency hopping mode. In this case, there can be TRXs that do not join in frequency
hopping on the cell. When this parameter is set to "Hybrid_FH", the cell is in hybrid
frequency hopping. In this case, some TRXs on the cell must join in baseband frequency hopping, some cells on the cell must join in
RF frequency hopping, and some cells on the cell must not join in frequency hopping.
Maximum number of former values when the receive level of the serving cell or the receive
level of the neighbor cell is filtered. The greater the value, the greater the weight of
the former receive levels; otherwise, the greater the weight of the later receive levels.
Whether to enable 0.2 dB downlink power control. This power control function improves
the power control precision.
Whether to start the fire-extinguishing equipment of the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. If the static Abis resource load is less than the static Abis
resource load threshold, the TCHF is preferentially allocated. Otherwise, whether
the TCHF or the TCHH should be preferentially allocated is determined by the
dynamic Abis resource load.
Whether to enable the filtering of the intermittent alarms. If the value of this
parameter is "DISABLE", "Flash Statis Alarm Raise Time Window" and "Flash Statis Alarm
Clear Time" are invalid.
None FIX_16K_ABIS
OFF, ON None OFF
OFF, ON None OFF
OFF, ON None None Specified port flow control switch
0~20 None 10
FIX_16K_ABIS, FLEX_ABIS, SEMI_ABIS
Service timeslot assignment mode for the BTS. If this parameter is set to
FIX_16K_ABIS, the BSC6900 assigns a fixed Abis transmission timeslot to a TCH. If this
parameter is set to FLEX_ABIS, the BSC6900 assigns an Abis transmission timeslot
dynamically to a TCH (except the static PDCH) to increase the resource utilization. If this parameter is set to SEMI_ABIS, the BTS to which a TCH belongs assigns a fixed Abis transmission timeslot to the TCH while the upper-level BTS set to FLEX_ABIS assigns an Abis transmission timeslot dynamically to the TCH. This mode applies where old and new BTSs are cascaded. HDLC and IP BTS
is not support this parameter.
Whether to enable the function of Flex mobile allocation index offset (MAIO). In the tight frequency reuse case of the GSM system,
adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference easily occur between channels. If the frequency hopping function and the Flex
MAIO function are enabled in a cell, adjacent-channel or co-channel interference between
channels can be reduced partially.
Whether to enable the function of the Flex training sequence code (TSC). If the value of this parameter is ON and the BTS supports the Flex TSC function, the BSS dynamically allocates TSCs to hopping frequencies for
improving the security of calls.
One of the nine parameters (filter parameters A1 to A8 and filter parameter B) used to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. The
computation formula is as follows: C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-
2t) + ... + A8 x C(nt-7t)If C1(nt) is less than B and C(nt) is less than the threshold for edge handover, the signal
level is considered dropping rapidly.In the formula, A1 to A8 are filter parameters A1 to A8 minus 10 and B is the negative of
filter parameter B. C(nt) indicates the received signal level in the uplink measurement report
of the serving cell received at time nt.Setting the filter helps to configure the
maximum allowed signal level drop degree.
0~20 None 10
0~20 None 10
0~20 None 10
One of the nine parameters (filter parameters A1 to A8 and filter parameter B) used to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. The
computation formula is as follows: C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-
2t) + ... + A8 x C(nt-7t)If C1(nt) is less than B and C(nt) is less than the threshold for edge handover, the signal
level is considered dropping rapidly.In the formula, A1 to A8 are filter parameters A1 to A8 minus 10 and B is the negative of
filter parameter B. C(nt) indicates the received signal level in the uplink measurement report
of the serving cell received at time nt.Setting the filter helps to configure the
maximum allowed signal level drop degree.
One of the nine parameters (filter parameters A1 to A8 and filter parameter B) used to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. The
computation formula is as follows: C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-
2t) + ... + A8 x C(nt-7t)If C1(nt) is less than B and C(nt) is less than the threshold for edge handover, the signal
level is considered dropping rapidly.In the formula, A1 to A8 are filter parameters A1 to A8 minus 10 and B is the negative of
filter parameter B. C(nt) indicates the received signal level in the uplink measurement report
of the serving cell received at time nt.Setting the filter helps to configure the
maximum allowed signal level drop degree.
One of the nine parameters (filter parameters A1 to A8 and filter parameter B) used to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. The
computation formula is as follows: C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-
2t) + ... + A8 x C(nt-7t)If C1(nt) is less than B and C(nt) is less than the threshold for edge handover, the signal
level is considered dropping rapidly.In the formula, A1 to A8 are filter parameters A1 to A8 minus 10 and B is the negative of
filter parameter B. C(nt) indicates the received signal level in the uplink measurement report
of the serving cell received at time nt.Setting the filter helps to configure the
maximum allowed signal level drop degree.
0~20 None 10
0~20 None 10
0~20 None 10
One of the nine parameters (filter parameters A1 to A8 and filter parameter B) used to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. The
computation formula is as follows: C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-
2t) + ... + A8 x C(nt-7t)If C1(nt) is less than B and C(nt) is less than the threshold for edge handover, the signal
level is considered dropping rapidly.In the formula, A1 to A8 are filter parameters A1 to A8 minus 10 and B is the negative of
filter parameter B. C(nt) indicates the received signal level in the uplink measurement report
of the serving cell received at time nt.Setting the filter helps to configure the
maximum allowed signal level drop degree.
One of the nine parameters (filter parameters A1 to A8 and filter parameter B) used to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. The
computation formula is as follows: C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-
2t) + ... + A8 x C(nt-7t)If C1(nt) is less than B and C(nt) is less than the threshold for edge handover, the signal
level is considered dropping rapidly.In the formula, A1 to A8 are filter parameters A1 to A8 minus 10 and B is the negative of
filter parameter B. C(nt) indicates the received signal level in the uplink measurement report
of the serving cell received at time nt.Setting the filter helps to configure the
maximum allowed signal level drop degree.
One of the nine parameters (filter parameters A1 to A8 and filter parameter B) used to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. The
computation formula is as follows: C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-
2t) + ... + A8 x C(nt-7t)If C1(nt) is less than B and C(nt) is less than the threshold for edge handover, the signal
level is considered dropping rapidly.In the formula, A1 to A8 are filter parameters A1 to A8 minus 10 and B is the negative of
filter parameter B. C(nt) indicates the received signal level in the uplink measurement report
of the serving cell received at time nt.Setting the filter helps to configure the
maximum allowed signal level drop degree.
0~20 None 10
0~200 None 0
0~19 None 5
INDOOR, OUTDOOR None None Type of the FMUA board
One of the nine parameters (filter parameters A1 to A8 and filter parameter B) used to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. The
computation formula is as follows: C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-
2t) + ... + A8 x C(nt-7t)If C1(nt) is less than B and C(nt) is less than the threshold for edge handover, the signal
level is considered dropping rapidly.In the formula, A1 to A8 are filter parameters A1 to A8 minus 10 and B is the negative of
filter parameter B. C(nt) indicates the received signal level in the uplink measurement report
of the serving cell received at time nt.Setting the filter helps to configure the
maximum allowed signal level drop degree.
Trend of the received signal level of the cell during a period. This parameter helps to
configure the filter for determining whether the received signal level drops rapidly. If this
parameter is higher, a more rapid signal level drop is required to trigger the handover due to
rapid signal level drop.
Maximum transmit power level of MSs. As one of the cell reselection parameters in
system message 3, this parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details,
see GSM Rec. 05.05.In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power
control level of an MS ranges from 0 to 19, corresponding respectively to the following
values (unit: dBm): 43, 41, 39, 37, 35, 33, 31, 29, 27, 25, 23, 21, 19, 17, 15, 13, 11, 9, 7, and 5.Generally, the maximum transmit
power supported by an MS is level 5 (corresponding to 33 dBm). The minimum
transmit power supported by an MS is level 19 (corresponding to 5 dBm). Other transmit
power levels are reserved for high-power MSs.
In a GSM1800 or GSM1900 cell, the maximum power control level of an MS
ranges from 0 to 31, corresponding respectively to the following values (unit:
0, 36, 34, and 32. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 0
(corresponding to 30 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 15 (corresponding to 0 dBm). Other transmit
power levels are reserved for high-power MSs.
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None YES
OFF, ON None None
OFF, ON None None
OFF, ON None None
0~255 None 0
NO, YES None YES
0~1023 None None Frequency of the TRX0~1023 None None Frequency 10~1023 None None Frequency 100~1023 None None Frequency 110~1023 None None Frequency 120~1023 None None Frequency 130~1023 None None Frequency 140~1023 None None Frequency 150~1023 None None Frequency 160~1023 None None Frequency 170~1023 None None Frequency 180~1023 None None Frequency 190~1023 None None Frequency 2
Whether to forcibly enable the EFR function. When this parameter is set to YES, if both the MS and the BSC6900 support the enhanced full rate (EFR), the BSC6900 forcibly enables the EFR function even if the MSC does not
support the function.
Whether an MS is forced to send a Handover Access message, which is indicated by an
information element in the handover command.
Whether to generate the frequency and BSIC by using the automatic optimization algorithm
If this switch is on, it indicates that the frequency and BSIC are generated
automatically. If this switch is off, it indicates that the data must be configured manually.
If this switch is on, it indicates that the frequency and BSIC are generated
automatically. If this switch is off, it indicates that the data must be configured manually.
Frame offset. The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of neighboring cells do not
appear in the same frame, which is helpful for the coding of an MS. If the value of this
parameter is 0, the cell is not offset. If the value is 255, this parameter is not sent. If the parameter is set to a value except for 0 and
255, the handover of the cell must be changed from the synchronous mode to the
asynchronous mode. For BTS3001C, BTS3X, BTS3002C, and double-transceiver BTSs, the frame offset can be predicted according to the
value of this parameter.
Whether the downlink discontinuous transmission (DTX) function is enabled for full rate (FR) calls. This function is also restricted
by the DTX switch in the MSC. If the MSC allows the downlink DTX for calls and the
value of this parameter(FRDLDTX) is YES, the downlink DTX is enabled for FR calls of
cells.
0~1023 None None Frequency 200~1023 None None Frequency 210~1023 None None Frequency 220~1023 None None Frequency 230~1023 None None Frequency 240~1023 None None Frequency 250~1023 None None Frequency 260~1023 None None Frequency 270~1023 None None Frequency 280~1023 None None Frequency 290~1023 None None Frequency 30~1023 None None Frequency 300~1023 None None Frequency 310~1023 None None Frequency 320~1023 None None Frequency 330~1023 None None Frequency 340~1023 None None Frequency 350~1023 None None Frequency 360~1023 None None Frequency 370~1023 None None Frequency 380~1023 None None Frequency 390~1023 None None Frequency 40~1023 None None Frequency 400~1023 None None Frequency 410~1023 None None Frequency 420~1023 None None Frequency 430~1023 None None Frequency 440~1023 None None Frequency 450~1023 None None Frequency 460~1023 None None Frequency 470~1023 None None Frequency 480~1023 None None Frequency 490~1023 None None Frequency 50~1023 None None Frequency 500~1023 None None Frequency 510~1023 None None Frequency 520~1023 None None Frequency 530~1023 None None Frequency 540~1023 None None Frequency 550~1023 None None Frequency 560~1023 None None Frequency 570~1023 None None Frequency 580~1023 None None Frequency 590~1023 None None Frequency 60~1023 None None Frequency 600~1023 None None Frequency 610~1023 None None Frequency 620~1023 None None Frequency 630~1023 None None Frequency 640~1023 None None Frequency 70~1023 None None Frequency 80~1023 None None Frequency 9
NO, YES None NO
Whether to enable the automatic frequency correction algorithm. This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover algorithm. If the parameter is set to YES, the BTS calculates
the speed at which an MS leaves or approaches it, and sends the BSC6900 the calculated speed in an uplink measurement
report.
0~65535 None 36671
None None
0~100 per cent 25
0~1023 None None List of frequency bands
LOOSE, TIGHT None LOOSE
None MaximumMeanValue
Frequency correction parameter. Used for the fast-moving handover algorithm, the value of
this parameter must be translated into a binary number. The value consists of 16 bit.
The most significant bit indicates whether the parameter is valid. Bits 14 to 8 indicate the
level threshold. Bits 7 to 0 indicate the threshold of the bit error ratio (BER).
The BSC6900 sends this parameter to the BTS, which adjusts the frequency of an MS
Frequency band types of the board This parameter is only applicable to the
DDPU/DFCU/DFCB/DCOM/DDPM/DCBM.The frequency band types for the DTRU, QTRU, DRRU, DRFU, GRRU, MRRU,
GRFU, and MRFU cannot be configured and thus are calculated based on the selected frequencies such as GSM900, DSC1800,
PCS1900,and GSM850. The parameter value for the other board types is set to 0xFF.
Threshold for load sharing in the 900 MHz frequency band. Assume that an MS supports multiple sub-bands in the 900 MHz frequency band. If the cell load is equal to or less than
this threshold, the BSC does not consider the priority levels of the P-GSM, E-GSM, and R-GSM sub-bands during channel assignment. If the cell load is greater than this threshold, the BSC assigns channels according to the priority levels of the P-GSM, E-GSM, and R-GSM sub-bands. That is, if the MS supports the P-GSM, E-GSM, and R-GSM sub-bands
and the cell is configured with the TRXs in the P-GSM, E-GSM, and R-GSM sub-bands, the BSC assigns the channels in the TRXs of the
R-GSM sub-band preferentially.
Frequency multiplexing mode in the TRX. To enable a loose frequency multiplexing mode such as 4x3 multiplexing, set this parameter
to LOOSE. To enable a tight frequency multiplexing mode such as 1x3 or 1x1, set
this parameter to TIGHT.
MainDiversity, MaximumMeanValue
Type of a scanning result in the period from the start of a frequency scanning task to the
reporting of the scanning result.Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of
an uplink receive level of a cell frequency. The scanning result reflects the strength of
frequency signals received by the cell.
NO, YES None YES
None Shall_Use
0~255 dB 20
0~600 s 5
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
0~255 dB 10
0~600 s 1
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 6
0~31 None 12
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None YES
Whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS makes a call at the
edge of a cell, the call may drop if the received signal level is too low. To avoid such
a call drop, the edge handover algorithm is involved. When the uplink signal level of the
serving cell is less than "Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold" or the downlink signal
level of the serving cell is less than "Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold", the edge handover is
triggered.
May_Use, Shall_Use, Shall_NOT_Use
Whether the uplink DTX function is enabled for FR calls. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
Uplink DTX is not restricted by the MSC. If this parameter is set to May_Use, the MS can use DTX. If this parameter is set to Shall_Use or Shall_Not_Use, the MS cannot use DTX.
ATCB difference between the overlaid and underlaid subcells
Duration of the handover from full rate to half rate. If the cell load is greater than the preset threshold, the calls that meet the conditions
for the handover from full rate to half rate are handed over from full rate to half rate in this
duration.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover from full rate to half rate are met for P seconds within N seconds, the handover
is triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
Path loss difference between the overlaid and underlaid subcells
Period of the handover from full rate to half rate. If the cell load is greater than the preset threshold, the calls that meet the conditions
for the handover from full rate to half rate are handed over in "H-F Ho Duration". This parameter specifies the bandwidth to be
handed over at each hierarchy level.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover from full rate to half rate are met for P seconds within N seconds, the handover
is triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
Expected signal receiving strength on the BTS side when GPRS dynamic power control
is implemented
Obtains the QoS parameter from the Aggregate BSS QoS Profile (ABQP) of packet
flow context (PFC) when the MS and the network support the PFC; obtains the QoS
parameter from the uplink request originated by the MS or the DL UNITDATA of the SGSN.
GBR: guaranteed bit rate.
Whether the assignment of channels in overlaid subcells is enabled for the VGCS
service in the case of underlaid subcell congestion. Generally, only the channels in underlaid subcells can be assigned to the
VGCS service.
NO, YES None YES
0.5~4, step: 1/8 bit 20
None NO Whether the current cell supports GPRS
dB 2dB
Whether direct preemption of the channels of other services is enabled for the VGCS
service. If the value of this parameter is NO, a handover is performed for the call whose channel is preempted. If the value is YES, calls on the preempted channel are directly
released.
Delay of transmit diversity when GMSK is used. Generally, the parameter is applicable to general fading environments. In this case, the transmit diversity can obtain the gain of 3
dB to 5 dB. The fading degrees, however, vary with environments. For a fixed delay, different UEs may obtain different gains. In addition, a fixed delay may have negative
impacts on some codes of the EDGE service. Therefore, the delay of transmit diversity must be configurable and can be set for GMSK and
8PSK respectively.
NO, SupportAsInnPcu, SupportAsExtPcu
0dB, 2dB, 4dB, 6dB, 8dB, 10dB, 12dB, 14dB
Hysteresis value of the cell in the same routing area. When the MS in the ready state
reselects a cell, if the original cell and the target cell are in the same routing area, the
C2 values of the two cells at the border of the cell are quite different due to radio channel
fading. As a result, the MS frequently reselects cells. Frequent cell reselection can lead to increase of signaling traffic, inefficient use of radio resources, decrease of MS data
transmission rate, and thus reducing the network service quality. The cell reselection
hysteresis parameter is introduced. The signal level of the adjacent cell in the same area must be greater than that of the local
cell. The difference of the signal level must be greater than the value of the cell reselection
hysteresis parameter. Otherwise, the MS cannot reselect a cell. The greater the
GPRS cell reselection hysteresis value, the harder to start cell reselection.
This parameter is used to prevent repeated cell reselection of a fast moving MS. The MS does not select this cell when the duration of
maintaining the BCCH signal channel strength does not reach the penalty time.
GPS, GLONASS, GPSGlonass
Synchronization clock adopted when two satellite cards are used together. GPS:Trace GPS only. GLONASS:Trace GLONASS only.
GPSGlonass:Trace GPS and GLONASS.
Whether to allow hierarchical access and to reserve resources for high-priority MSs
Number of the VGCS call that the BTS originates in the timeslot in the TRX in
fallback mode. This parameter is represented in decimal, such as 10000569. If this
parameter is set to 100000000, the channel is not configured with any fixed group call.
Number of the VGCS call that the BTS originates in the timeslot in the TRX in
fallback mode. This parameter is represented in decimal, such as 10000569. If this
parameter is set to 100000000, the channel is not configured with any fixed group call.
Maximum number of secondary links that are released in batches when the Abis resource
preemption occurs on the Abis interface
Geographical coverage of a simple cell broadcast message. You can run "DSP
GSMSCB" to query and obtain the information.
This parameter, "Code", and "Update" uniquely specify a cell broadcast message.
Number of neighboring cells that meet the following conditions: If "MBR" is indicated in a system message, the MS reports the number of neighboring cells at each frequency band. If
the MS reports the number of neighboring cells at the same frequency band of the
serving cell, it can report a maximum of the value of this parameter.
These neighboring cells must meet the following requirements:
1. The receive levels of the neighboring cells must be higher than "900 Reporting
Threshold" or "1800 Reporting Threshold".2. The BSIC of a neighboring cell must be
valid.3. The signals of the neighboring cells must be the strongest among all the neighboring
cells at the same frequency band.
Whether to support the cell reselection from the GSM network to the TD network in the
packet transmission mode
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None 255.255.255.255
0~255 dB 20
0~600 s 5
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
0~255 dB 10
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 6
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES dB NO
0.5~8, step:0.5 s 2
0.5~8, step:0.5 s 3
0~65535 None 65535
0~65535 None 65535
1~14 None 1
NO, YES None NO
When the BTS is accessed from the public network, the BTS security network IP address
must be configured.
IP address of the BTS security gateway. This parameter needs to be configured when the BTS connects to the BSC6900 through the
public network.
ATCB difference between the overlaid and underlaid subcells
Duration of the handover from half rate to full rate. If the cell load is less than the preset
threshold, the calls that meet the conditions for the handover from half rate to full rate are handed over from half rate to full rate in this
duration.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover from half rate to full rate are met for P seconds within N seconds, the handover
is triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
Path loss difference between the overlaid and underlaid subcells
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover from half rate to full rate are met for P seconds within N seconds, the handover
is triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
Whether the tower-top amplifier is installed on antenna tributary 1.
Whether the tower-top amplifier is installed on antenna tributary 2.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover to a different micro cell due to
fast movement are met in P of N measurement reports, the handover is
triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover to a different micro cell due to
fast movement are met in P of N measurement reports, the handover is
triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
Threshold for interrupting the power supply to the TRXs. If the BTS works with the battery
power supply, when the battery voltage is less than this threshold, the BTS interrupts the power supply to the TRXs to protect the lower-level BTSs from being affected.
Threshold for interrupting the power supply to the TMU. If the BTS works with the battery
power supply, when the battery voltage is less than this threshold, the BTS interrupts the
power supply to the TMU.
Full rate TCHs are assigned preferentially to the MSs with priority levels equal to or less than this threshold, except when the MSs
request only half or full rate TCHs.
Whether to enable the priority-based channel assignment algorithm
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None UNSUPPORT
None SysOpt
0~63 dB 10
0~63 dB 0
BYCELLNAME, BYCGI None None Type of indexing the target cell
1~64 characters None None Unique name of the target cell
None HOALGORITHM1
NO, YES None NO
Whether to enable load power-off against high temperature
Whether to consider history priority records during channel assignment.
If this parameter is set to YES, the history priority records are considered. If this
parameter is set to NO, the history priority records are not considered.
Whether the cell supports the MS with the DTM multi-timeslot capability
SysOpt, OSubcell, USubcell, NoPrefer
Whether to assign a channel in the overlaid or underlaid subcell in the case of the intra-BSC
incoming handover to the concentric cell.If this parameter is set to SysOpt, the
measured BCCH of the target cell is included in the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request
message. Then, the BSC compares the measured value with "RX_LEV Threshold" to
choose the preferred subcell. During this course, the BSC does not consider "RX_LEV
Hysteresis".If this parameter is set to OSubcell, a channel
in the overlaid subcell is assigned preferentially.
If this parameter is set to USubcell, a channel in the underlaid subcell is assigned
preferentially.If this parameter is set to NoPrefer, a channel
is assigned simply according to channel assignment algorithms.
If the downlink received signal level of a neighbor cell is greater than "Min DL Level on
Candidate Cell" plus "Min Access Level Offset", the neighbor cell can be listed in the
candidate cell queue for handover.
If the uplink received signal level of a neighbor cell is greater than "Min UL Level on
Candidate Cell" plus "Min Access Level Offset", the neighbor cell can be listed in the
candidate cell queue for handover.
HOALGORITHM1, HOALGORITHM2
Whether to use handover algorithm generation 1 or 2 currently
Handover direction forcast switch. When this parameter is set to YES, the BSC6900 can forecast the handover direction of the call in fast handover so that the best target cell can
be selected for handover.
0~16 None 3
0~16 None 3
0~63 dB 50
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 8
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 8
0~49 dB 35
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 3
None None
0~127 dB 68
This parameter indicates P in the P/N rule for MS handover direction forcast.
P/N rule: Among N handovers, the MS is handed over to Class B chain neighboring cell for successively P times, then the BSC6900
determines that the MS is moving to the Class B chain neighboring cell.
This parameter indicates N in the P/N rule for MS handover direction forcast.
P/N rule: Among N handovers, the MS is handed over to Class B chain neighboring cell for successively P times, then the BSC6900
determines that the MS is moving to the Class B chain neighboring cell.
Fast handover can be triggered only when the downlink level of the serving cell is less than
this parameter.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover to a better 3G cell are met for P seconds within N seconds, the handover is
triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover to a better 3G cell are met for P seconds within N seconds, the handover is
triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
The 3G better cell handover can be triggered only when the Ec/No of a neighboring 3G cell
is greater than this threshold for a period of time.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for fast handover are met in P of N measurement
reports, the handover is triggered.This parameter specifies the number P.
FREE, INCELL, OUTCELL, OUTST, OUTBSC, OUTSYS,
SPCELL
Type of handover in terms of connection transfer between channels or between cells
Fast handover can be triggered only when the path loss difference between the serving cell and a neighbor cell on the chain is equal to or
greater than this parameter.
0~61 dB 32
None Pre_2G_CellThres
0~255 s 5
0~63 None None
0~63 None None Logical number of the MA group
BaseBand_FH, RF_FH None None Implementation mode of frequency hopping
NO, YES, NONE None YES
If the cell is an enhanced concentric cell, this parameter with the current downlink received
signal level and "UtoO HO Received Level Threshold" determines whether to assign a channel in the underlaid subcell to the intra-
BSC incoming handover to the concentric cell or intra-BSC inter-cell handover.
If the cell is an ordinary concentric cell, this parameter with the current downlink received
signal level, "RX_LEV Threshold", and "RX_LEV Hysteresis" determines whether to assign a channel in the underlaid subcell to
the intra-BSC incoming handover to the concentric cell or intra-BSC inter-cell
handover.
Pre_2G_Cell, Pre_3G_Cell,
Pre_2G_CellThres
This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or to a 3G cell is preferentially selected as the
target cell for handover. When
this parameter is set to Pre_2G_Cell, the BSC preferentially selects a 2G candidate cell as
the target cell for handover. When this parameter is set to Pre_3G_Cell, the BSC preferentially selects a 3G candidate cell as the target cell
for handover. When this parameter is set to Pre_2G_CellThres, the BSC preferentially
selects a neighboring 3G cell as the handover target cell if the receive level of the neighboring 2G cell that ranks the first in the candidate cell list is equal to or smaller than
"HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell". Otherwise, the BSC preferentially selects a neighboring 2G cell as the handover target
cell.
An MS cannot be handed over from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell in this duration after the MS is handed over from the
overlaid subcell to the underlaid subcell successfully.
Index of the frequency hopping data, used for a TRX to locate the frequency hopping
sequence
Whether to enable power boost before handover.
When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the
BSC6900 cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and the BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive a handover command, thus leading to a call drop. If the value of this parameter is YES (StartUp), the transmit power of the BTS
is adjusted to the maximum before the BSC6900 sends a handover command to the
MS. In addition, the transmit power of the BTS is not adjusted during the handover for the purpose of ensuring the success of the
handover.
0~63 dB 25
0~63 None 0
0~23 None None
None NO_FH
0~63 dB 63
0~63 dB 50
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 10
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 10
If the receive level of the neighboring 2G cell that ranks the first in the candidate cell list is
equal to or smaller than this threshold, the BSC preferentially selects a neighboring 3G cell as the handover target cell. Otherwise,
the BSC preferentially selects a neighboring 2G cell as the handover target cell.
Hoping sequence number (HSN) of a hopping antenna group. If the value of this parameter is 0, the services over a TRX are adjusted to other TRXs in the hopping antenna group in sequence. If this parameter is set to a value from 1 to 63, the services over a TRX are
adjusted to other TRXs in the hopping antenna group in a pseudo-random manner,
that is a disciplinary random manner.
TRX index that a hopping antenna index corresponds to. A hopping antenna enables signals of multiple TRXs to switch between
several antennas instead of fixing an antenna for a TRX. This reduces the effect of Rayleigh
fading on signals of some frequencies.
NO_FH, BaseBand_FH, RF_FH
Frequency hopping mode of the TRX. Frequency hopping assists in interference
averaging and frequency diversity.If this parameter is set to RF_FH, the TX and
RX parts of the TRX take part in the frequency hopping. In this case, the number
of hopping frequencies can exceed the number of TRXs in the cell. If this parameter
is set to BaseBand_FH, each transmitter works at a fixed frequency. That is, the TX
part does not take part in the frequency hopping. The baseband signals are switched for the frequency-hopping transmission. The RX part, however, takes part in the frequency
hopping.
To avoid ping-pong handover, the received signal of the original serving cell is decreased by "Quick handover punish value" in "Quick handover punish time" after fast handover
succeeds.
The 3G better cell handover is triggered only when the RSCP of a neighboring 3G cell is
greater than this threshold for a period of time.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover to a better 3G cell are met in P of N measurement reports, the handover is
triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for the handover to a better 3G cell are met in P of N measurement reports, the handover is
triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
None SINGLEHOST Host type of an IP BTS
0~63 dB 25
0~63 dB 50
None NONE
According to the P/N rule, if the conditions for fast handover are met in P of N measurement
reports, the handover is triggered.This parameter specifies the number N.
SINGLEHOST, PRIMHOST, SLAVEHOST
Handover threshold during the handovers between cells on different layers or of
different priorities. This value is used to suppress inter-layer ping-pong handovers.
Inter-layer handover threshold of the serving cell = "Inter-layer HO threshold" - "Inter-layer
HO Hysteresis"; Inter-layer handover threshold of a
neighboring cell = "Inter-layer HO Threshold" + "Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis" -
64.
Fast handover can be triggered only when the uplink signal level of the serving cell is less
than this parameter.
NO_HPANT, YES_HPANT, NONE
Whether to enable the TRX to support antenna hopping
In a GSM cell, the BCCH broadcasts the frequency, frame number, system information,
and paging group. If an MS is in an unfavorable position or the antenna of the
main TRX that carries the BCCH fails, the MS receives poor broadcast control signals or even cannot receive any broadcast control message from the BCCH. To avoid such a problem, the antenna hopping function is
involved. With this function, the messages transmitted in the main TRX that carries the BCCH are also transmitted on the antennas of all the other TRXs in the cell in turn. This
helps the MSs receive quality broadcast control data. This function can be configured
only for dual-frequency BTSs. If this parameter is set to NONE, the BTS does not
support antenna hopping.
None None
1~14 None 1
NO, YES None NO
35.0~55.6 (step: 0.1) V 440
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
None Shall_Use
NO_HPANT, YES_HPANT
Whether to enable the TRX to support antenna hopping
In a GSM cell, the BCCH broadcasts the frequency, frame number, system information,
and paging group. If an MS is in an unfavorable position or the antenna of the
main TRX that carries the BCCH fails, the MS receives poor broadcast control signals or even cannot receive any broadcast control message from the BCCH. To avoid such as
problem, the antenna hopping function is involved. With this function, the messages
transmitted in the main TRX that carries the BCCH are also transmitted on the antennas of all the other TRXs in the cell in turn. This
helps the MSs receive quality broadcast control data. This function can be configured
only for dual-frequency BTSs.
Maximum priority level of an MS that can use reserved channel resources. If the priority
level of an MS is greater than this parameter, the MS is considered a low-priority MS. If the priority of an MS is equal to or less than this
threshold, the MS is considered a high-priority MS.
Whether to enable the configuration of power system parameters.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Load power-off voltage threshold.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
This parameter determines whether the BSC6900 supports new establishment causes
of an MS in the initial access request. This parameter does not affect the half-rate
function of cells.
Whether the downlink DTX function is enabled for half rate (HR) calls. This function
is also restricted by the DTX switch in the MSC. If the MSC allows the downlink DTX for
calls and the value of this parameter(HRDLDTX) is YES, the downlink
DTX is enabled for HR calls of cells.
Whether to enable the BSC to assign half or full rate channels to MSs according to the channel seizure ratio in the overlaid and
underlaid subcells
May_Use, Shall_Use, Shall_NOT_Use
Whether the uplink DTX function is enabled for HR calls. For details, see GSM Rec.
05.08. Uplink DTX is not restricted by the MSC. If this parameter is set to May_Use, the
MS can use DTX. If this parameter is set to Shall_Use or Shall_Not_Use, the MS cannot
use DTX.
0~63 None 0
OFF, ON None OFF
-99~70 degree Celsius 40
0~30 degree Celsius None
DISABLE, ENABLE None ENABLE
1~30 min 15
0~23 dB 4
0~23 dB 10
NO, YES None NO Whether to enable the IBCA algorithm
Hopping sequence number (HSN), indicating 64 types of frequency hopping sequences. If
this parameter is set to 0, the frequency hopping is performed in sequence.
If this parameter is set to a value from 1 to 63, the frequency hopping is performed in a
pseudo-random manner, that is a disciplinary random manner.
Whether dynamic use of HSNs is enabled. If the functions of frequency hopping and Flex MAIO are enabled in a cell and the value of
this parameter is ON, adjacent-channel interference between channels can be
reduced.
If the ambient temperature is higher than "High Temperature Critical Point", the
temperature control system controls the difference between the inlet and outlet
temperatures.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
If the outlet temperature is higher than "High Temperature Critical Point" and the difference between the outlet temperature and ambient
temperature reaches the value of this parameter, the temperature control system
controls the difference between the inlet and outlet temperatures.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable battery power-off against high temperature.
Delay for which the BTS waits to switch on the air conditioner
Minimum C/I ratio that IBCA AMR FR services allow. An idle channel can be
assigned to such a service only when the C/I ratio of the idle channel is greater than this threshold. In addition, a new call associated with such a service can be established only
when the call does not decrease the C/I ratio of the established calls to a value less than
this threshold.
Minimum C/I ratio that IBCA AMR HR services allow. An idle channel can be
assigned to such a service only when the C/I ratio of the idle channel is greater than this threshold. In addition, a new call associated with such a service can be established only
when the call does not decrease the C/I ratio of the established calls to a value less than
this threshold.
0~10, Step: 0.5 s 4
ms 4
0~14 dB 0
0~14 dB 4
0~63 dB 7
NO, YES None NO
Length of the timer for a new call to wait for the measurement report (MR) on the
signaling channel when dynamic measurement of the BA2 list is enabled
during assignment. If this parameter is set to 0, dynamic measurement of the BA2 list is not
enabled during assignment.
TCH:480~1920, step:480; SDCCH:470~1880,
step:470
Number of measurement reports sampled for averaging path loss. A single measurement
report may not reflect the actual network situations accurately. Therefore, the BSC needs to average the measured values in
several successive measurement reports to reflect the radio environment.
When the IBCA algorithm is enabled, this parameter is used to calculate the actual soft
blocking threshold of an existing call. The formula is as follows: Actual soft blocking
threshold of an existing call = Configured soft blocking threshold of an existing call - IBCA
Set-up Call Soft Block Threshold Offset.
When the IBCA algorithm is enabled, this parameter is used to calculate the target CIR of an existing call. The formula is as follows: Target CIR of an existing call = Target CIR in use + Target CIR Offset of IBCA Set-Up Call.
Difference between uplink and downlink path losses, which is used to estimate the downlink
path loss of a call when the downlink path loss cannot be computed directly according to
a measurement report. This parameter is configured according to the combined loss
and hierarchical dual-antenna gain (3 dB) of the BTS.
"IBCA Downlink Path Loss Offset" = combined loss of BTS + hierarchical dual-
antenna gain of BTS (3 dB)
Whether to measure the IBCA neighbor cells of the serving cell dynamically. If the dynamic measurement is enabled, when a call uses a channel, the BSC sends the SACCH Modify
message to modify the frequencies in the BA2 table in System Information 5, 5bis, and 5ter
to the frequencies at which the IBCA neighbor cells operate. Thus, the call measures and
reports only these frequencies to the BSC6900.
0~10, Step: 0.5 s 0
OFF, ON None OFF
OFF, ON None OFF
0~23 dB 10
0~10, Step: 0.5 s 2
Length of the timer for a call to measure the path loss in the neighboring cell with strong interference of the target cell. The call to be handed over needs to measure the path loss before initiating the handover to the target cell when dynamic measurement of the BA2 list is
enabled during the emergency handover. When this parameter is set to 0, dynamic
measurement of the BA2 list is not enabled in the emergency handover, and the parameter
"Wait Time for Valid MRs in IBCA HO" is invalid.
Whether the IBCA flexible TSC function is enabled. When this parameter is set to NO, the flexible TSC function is disabled and the
configured TSC is used. When the BTS supports Flex TSC and this parameter is set to YES, the flexible TSC function is enabled.
Whether the IBCA forced BTS synchronization is allowed. When this
parameter is set to YES, the synchronization procedure is performed even though the
BTSs are insynchronous. When this parameter is set to NO, the existing
procedure, either the synchronization procedure or the out-of-synchronization
procedure, is performed as required. Note that the synchronization status of the IBCA
neighboring cells is determined by the internal software parameters of the IBCA neighboring
cells, that is, if this parameter in IBCA neighboring cells is set to YES, the IBCA
neighboring cells are considered to be always synchronous; otherwise, the IBCA
neighboring cells are considered to be out of synchronization.
Minimum C/I ratio that IBCA FR/EFR services allow. An idle channel can be assigned to
such a service only when the C/I ratio of the idle channel is greater than this threshold. In addition, a new call associated with such a
service can be established only when the call does not decrease the C/I ratio of the
established calls to a value less than this threshold.
Length of the timer for a call to wait for other valid MRs after receiving the first valid MR of the target cell if dynamic measurement of the BA2 list is enabled during handover. When this parameter is set to 0, the call does not
wait for other MRs after receiving the first MR of the target cell.
0~23 dB 13
0~31 dB 10
NO, YES None YES
0~63 dB 0
0~63 dB 0
0~22 dB 0
0~22 dB 0
0~63 dB 4
0, 1 None 0
Minimum C/I ratio that IBCA HR services allow. An idle channel can be assigned to
such a service only when the C/I ratio of the idle channel is greater than this threshold. In addition, a new call associated with such a
service can be established only when the call does not decrease the C/I ratio of the
established calls to a value less than this threshold.
In the ICDM matrix algorithm, the signal strength (0-63) is divided into 10 levels. The
signal strength that is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter is at the initial
level.
Whether to enable the ICDM algorithm for the cell. The ICDM algorithm helps to improve
the precision in estimating the path loss of an IBCA neighbor cell and to increase the
efficiency of the IBCA algorithm.
Adds a specified offset to the downlink target receive level when power control algorithm III is used to calculate the initial transmit power
of a BTS in the IBCA function
Adds a specified offset to the uplink target receive level when power control algorithm III is used to calculate the initial transmit power
of an MS in the IBCA function
Adds a specified offset to the downlink target receive quality when power control algorithm
III is used to calculate the initial transmit power of a BTS in the IBCA function
Adds a specified offset to the uplink target receive quality when power control algorithm
III is used to calculate the initial transmit power of an MS in the IBCA function
In an IUO cell (or a CoBCCH cell), the path loss of an MS to the serving cell or a
neighboring cell measured on the underlay is used together with this parameter to estimate
the path loss on the overlay. IUO path loss compensation = Combiner insert loss
difference + Path loss difference due to the use of different antennas + Path loss difference due to different frequency
selectivity. This value is calculated based on the IUO level values measured by field
engineers. When different antennas are used by the overlay and underlay, the level must be
measured at multiple locations.
Determines the MAIO selection method for each timeslot. The Optimal MAIO policy
selects the optimal MAIO being evaluated, while the Random MAIO policy randomly selects a MAIO out of qualified MAIOs.
5~40 None 20
NO, YES None NO
0~63 dB 0
0~30 dB 7
0~10, Step: 0.5 s 5
The IBCA interference evaluation process only considers the interference of the
strongest N existing calls on the newly-established call being evaluated. This parameter corresponds to the above-
mentioned N.
Indicates whether this neighboring cell is the IBCA neighboring cell of the serving cell. That
is, when a cell is configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell, whether
the IBCA algorithm considers the interference between the serving cell and the neighboring
cell.
Estimates the receive level of the unmeasured IBCA neighboring cells. When a consecutive "IBCA Non Measurement Ncell Stat. Num" measurement reports cover less than six neighboring cells (or the number of
the reported neighboring cells is smaller than that of the actually configured neighboring
cells), this parameter is used to estimate the receive level of the unmeasured IBCA
neighboring cells. The estimated value is "IBCA Pathloss Est of Non. MR Ncell". Otherwise, the signal strength of the
unmeasured IBCA neighboring cells is the signal strength of the measured neighboring cells (including non-IBCA neighboring cells)
subtracted by "IBCA RxLev Offset".
When the IBCA algorithm is enabled, this parameter is used to calculate the target CIR
of a new call. The formula is as follows: Target CIR of a new call = Target CIR in use
+ Target CIR Offset of IBCA New Call
Length of the timer for a call to measure the path loss in the neighboring cell with strong interference of the target cell. The call to be handed over needs to measure the path loss before initiating the handover to the target cell when dynamic measurement of the BA2 list is enabled during the normal handover. When
this parameter is set to 0, dynamic measurement of the BA2 list is not enabled in
the normal handover, and the parameter "Wait Time for Valid MRs in IBCA HO" is
invalid.
0~16 None 4
0~63 None 0
0~50 dB 15
0~10 None 6
0~63 dB 4
0~160 dB 110
Estimates the receive level of the unmeasured IBCA neighboring cells. When a consecutive "IBCA Non Measurement Ncell Stat. Num" measurement reports cover less than six neighboring cells (or the number of
the reported neighboring cells is smaller than that of the actually configured neighboring
cells), this parameter is used to estimate the receive level of the unmeasured IBCA
neighboring cells. The estimated value is "IBCA Pathloss Est of Non. MR Ncell". Otherwise, the signal strength of the
unmeasured IBCA neighboring cells is the signal strength of the measured neighboring cells (including non-IBCA neighboring cells)
subtracted by "IBCA RxLev Offset".
When the IBCA algorithm is enabled and the HSN is not 0, the IBCA priority and the
SDCCH/PDCH priority are divided by this corrected factor respectively to reduce the
weight of IBCA priority. In addition, the priority of the interference band is considered.
When the path loss of an MS to a neighboring cell cannot be measured based on the
existing measurement results, it is estimated based on the path loss of the MS to the
serving cell plus the IBCA path loss offset.
Considers the influence of history path loss information during the calculation of the ICDM algorithm path loss. The smaller the filtering
coefficient, the smaller the influence of history path loss; on the other hand, the larger the
filtering coefficient, the larger the influence of history path loss.
Estimates the receive level of the unmeasured IBCA neighboring cells. When a consecutive "IBCA Non Measurement Ncell Stat. Num" measurement reports cover less than six neighboring cells (or the number of
the reported neighboring cells is smaller than that of the actually configured neighboring
cells), this parameter is used to estimate the receive level of the unmeasured IBCA
neighboring cells. The estimated value is "IBCA Pathloss Est of Non. MR Ncell". Otherwise, the signal strength of the
unmeasured IBCA neighboring cells is the signal strength of the measured neighboring cells (including non-IBCA neighboring cells)
subtracted by "IBCA RxLev Offset".
Use this parameter when the path loss of an MS to serving cells cannot be measured
based on the existing measurement results
0~23 dB 1
NO, YES None NO
OFF, ON None OFF
0~63 None 20
NO, UNDER, INNER, YES None UNDER
NO, YES None NO
0~23 dB 5
MSs that support SAIC can tolerate a lower carrier-to-interference ratio. This variable
indicates the downward adjustment step of the soft blocking threshold of SAIC MSs.
Whether to deny the access of a call when none of the MAIO evaluation results meets the C/I ratio requirement of the call during
channel assignment
Whether the handover of the calls on the single channels is allowed (single channels
are the two half-rate sub-channels on a timeslot, in which only one is in the occupied
state) when single channels are to be adjusted to a full-rate channel. When this
parameter is set to ON, the handover of the calls on the single channels is allowed; if this parameter is set to OFF, the handover of the calls on the single channels is not allowed. This parameter is valid only when the IBCA
algorithm is enabled and full rate is preferred for the newly established call.
Whether a MAIO meets the access requirement. When the C/I ratio of a MAIO is higher than this threshold, the MAIO can be
assigned to the call being processed.
Whether to enable the IBCA algorithm for the overlay and underlay of an IUO cell
Whether a single IBCA MS can dynamically measure the neighboring cells. When this
parameter is set to YES, the neighboring cells where "IBCA Dynamic Measure Neighbor Cell
Flag" is set to YES are dynamically measured. Dynamic measurement on
neighboring cells is mutually exclusive to directed retry. When this parameter is set to
YES, it is recommended that "Direct Retry" be set to NO.
The lowest C/I ratio that can be tolerated by IBCA WAMR FR. The C/I ratio of an idle
channel must be larger than this parameter. Otherwise, it cannot be assigned. In addition,
the system does not allow a newly-established call causing the C/I ratio of
existing calls to be lower than this parameter.
NO, YES, NULL None NO
DISABLE, ENABLE None ENABLE
0~65535 None None Index
0~63 None 2
BYNAME, BYID None None Type of an index
BYNAME, BYID None None Type of an index
BYNAME, BYID None None
YES, NO None YES
Positive, Minus None Positive
0~125 None 0
0~32 None 1
1000~30000 ms 5000
NO, YES None NO
This parameter is used to enable the Intelligent Combiner Bypass (ICB) function on
the BCCH TRX of a cell.This parameter specifies whether to allow the
cell to enable the ICB function. When this parameter is set to YES, the TCHs on the
non-BCCH TRX are preferentially assigned. In this way, the largest possible number of
idle TCHs is reserved on the BCCH TRX, and thus the BCCH TRX enters the ICB mode.
Whether to enable the intelligent control of the diesel engine. If this parameter is set to ENABLE, the PMU will control the diesel
engine automatically according to the settings of the parameters to save the energy. This
parameter is set to ENABLE by default.
When the number of idle SDCCH channels in a cell is smaller than this parameter, the system searches for available TCHs and transforms them into SDCCH channels.
Subscribers can specify the cell according to the index or the name.
Whether the handshake mechanism is enabled at the Cb interface. Currently, the BSC6900 and the CBC communications through the TCP/IP protocol. Thus, the
BSC6900 may not detect communication link disconnection in some cases. The handshake
mechanism is used for checking whether a communication link is normal.
Whether to set the middle frequency offset to positive offset or minus offset
Indication offset in the middle frequency offset configuration
Number of invalid measurement reports allowed when the BSC6900 filters the
measurement reports. When the number of received measurement reports is no larger
than this parameter, the BSC does not perform filtering or make quick handover
judgment.
Timer for the BSC6900 waiting for a CC message after sending a CR message. If the timer expires, the seized SDCCH is released.
The channel activation and immediate assignment messages are sent at the same time to accelerate the signaling processing, thus increasing the response speed of the
network.
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
0~254 ms 4
1~5 None 2
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
0~255 bit 0
0~255 s 10
This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate
assignment by the BTS. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the access rate of the MS, the BSS allocates the uplink TBF resources to the BTS in advance. The BTS sends the immediate assignment message to the MS through the resources allocated by the BSC. When receiving the
immediate assignment message, the MS can send the data block. The BTS needs to send
the assistant channel request to the BSC. When receiving the request, the BSC sends
the immediate assignment request to the BTS to complete the TDF setup flow.
Whether to allow immediate TCH assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the BSC can assign a TCH immediately when there is no
available SDCCH for a channel request. If this parameter is set to NO, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when processing a channel
access request.
Maximum time delay in resending an immediate assignment message. Within the
period specified by this parameter, an immediate assignment message can be
dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or retransmitted.
Maximum number of retransmissions of an immediate assignment message. When the
value of this parameter is reached, the immediate assignment message is not
retransmitted even if the value of "Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit" is not exceeded.
Whether the BSC6900 sends immediate assignment retransmission parameters to the
BTS
Whether to assign channels according to the access_delay value in channel request messages during immediate channel
assignment
When the access_delay value in the channel request message is smaller than this
parameter, the overlay channels are assigned preferentially; otherwise, the underlay channels are assigned preferentially.
Timer carried by the Wait Indication information element when the BSC6900 sends an immediate assignment reject
message to an MS.After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS
reattempts to access the network after the timer expires.
500~60000 ms 10000
0~360 degree 360
NO, YES None NO
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 8
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 10
0~39 None 25
0~39 None 12
0~50 W 8
0~3 None 1
0~3 None 0
0~2 None 2
Timer for the BSC6900 waiting for a handover complete message after sending a handover request acknowledgment message in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, a Clear REQ message is reported.
Included angle formed by the major lobe azimuths of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. A major lobe azimuth is measured from the due north to the direction of the cell
antenna in a clockwise rotation.
Whether to separate E1 from other optical fibers for the use of other devices. If this parameter is set to YES, other BTSs can
connect to the BSC6900 through the independent E1 port 3 of the
BTS3006C/BTS3002E.
The triggering of intra-cell F-H handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when the condition for intra-cell F-H handovers is met for P seconds during N seconds, an intra-cell
F-H handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to the P in the P/N criteria.
The triggering of intra-cell F-H handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when the condition for intra-cell F-H handovers is met for P seconds during N seconds, an intra-cell
F-H handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to the N in the P/N criteria.
For an AMR call, if the currently occupied channel is a full rate channel and the Radio
Quality Indication (RQI) is always higher than the threshold set by this parameter, an intra-
cell F-H handover is triggered.
For an AMR call, if the currently occupied channel is a half rate channel and the Radio Quality Indication (RQI) is always lower than the threshold set by this parameter, an intra-
cell H-F handover is triggered.
Power overload threshold for triggering incoming handover to the TRX under the
prerequisite that the power amplifier of the TRX provides the maximum output power.
Initial coding mode used for full rate AMR calls. The four values 0, 1, 2, and 3 of this
parameter respectively represent the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the
ACS.
Initial coding mode used for half rate AMR calls. The four values 0, 1, 2, and 3 of this
parameter respectively represent the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the
ACS.
Initial coding mode used for broadband AMR calls. The three values 0, 1 and 2 of this
parameter respectively represent the lowest, low and highest coding rates in the ACS.
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO
1~255 s 10
0~63 dB 5
0~100 per cent 90
Degree, D_min_sec None Degree
NO, YES None NO
2~3600 s None
0~127 dB 67
INTBANI, INTBANII None INTBANII
0~127 dB 68
0~255 s 15
0.5~8, step:0.5 s 2
0.5~8, step:0.5 s 3
Whether to assign channel requests in the overlay subcell to the underlay subcell according to "UL Subcell Lower Load
Threshold". If the load of the underlay subcell is lower than "UL Subcell Lower Load
Threshold", incoming calls in the overlay subcell will be preferentially assigned to the
underlay subcell.
Whether to allow underlay-to-overlay edge handovers
Whether to allow underlay-to-overlay load handovers
Overlay-to-underlay load handovers are performed by levels. This parameter indicates
the duration of each level.
Level step during overlay-to-underlay hierarchical load handovers
In an enhanced dual-band network, if the load of the overlay subcell is higher than this parameter, the system cannot initiate an
underlay-to-overlay handover.
Mode of inputting the latitude and longitude of a cell location
Whether to allow inter-BSC SDCCH handovers
Time interval for sending a simple cell broadcast message
Hysteresis value during the handovers between cells on different layers or of
different priorities. This value is used to suppress inter-layer ping-pong handovers.
Type of an interference band statistics algorithm used when the frequency scanning
function is enabled. The interference band statistics algorithm I uses pair average, and the interference band statistics algorithm II
uses linear average.
Reduces ping-pong handovers between cells on a same layer. This parameter is invalid
when cells are on different layers.
Specifies an interval between two consecutive interference handovers
The triggering of interference handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when P out of N measurement reports meet the condition for interference handovers, a concentric circle
handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to the P in the P/N criteria.
The triggering of interference handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when P out of N measurement reports meet the condition for interference handovers, a concentric circle
handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to the N in the P/N criteria.
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
48~115 None 110
48~115 None 105
Whether to allow the interference handover algorithm. Interference handovers are
triggered when the receive level is higher than the receive threshold while the transmit
quality is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, that is, when the
MSs are subject to all kinds of radio interferences.
Whether to consider interference priorities during channel assignment
Threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, and
calculates and reports the interference on each of the idle channels. This helps the
BSC6900 to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the
interference signals are classified into five interference levels. The values of these levels are called interference band thresholds. The
BTS determines the current interference level based on these thresholds, and then reports a
radio resource indication message to the BSC6900. The BSC6900 compares the busy
and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
statistics result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08 and GSM
Rec. 08.58.
Threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, and
calculates and reports the interference on each of the idle channels. This helps the
BSC6900 to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the
interference signals are classified into five interference levels. The values of these levels are called interference band thresholds. The
BTS determines the current interference level based on these thresholds, and then reports a
radio resource indication message to the BSC6900. The BSC6900 compares the busy
and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
statistics result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08 and GSM
Rec. 08.58.
48~115 None 98
48~115 None 92
Threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, and
calculates and reports the interference on each of the idle channels. This helps the
BSC6900 to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the
interference signals are classified into five interference levels. The values of these levels are called interference band thresholds. The
BTS determines the current interference level based on these thresholds, and then reports a
radio resource indication message to the BSC6900. The BSC6900 compares the busy
and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
statistics result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08 and GSM
Rec. 08.58.
Threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, and
calculates and reports the interference on each of the idle channels. This helps the
BSC6900 to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the
interference signals are classified into five interference levels. The values of these levels are called interference band thresholds. The
BTS determines the current interference level based on these thresholds, and then reports a
radio resource indication message to the BSC6900. The BSC6900 compares the busy
and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
statistics result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08 and GSM
Rec. 08.58.
48~115 None 87
48~115 None 85
480~14880, step: 480 ms 20
NO, YES None NO
Threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, and
calculates and reports the interference on each of the idle channels. This helps the
BSC6900 to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the
interference signals are classified into five interference levels. The values of these levels are called interference band thresholds. The
BTS determines the current interference level based on these thresholds, and then reports a
radio resource indication message to the BSC6900. The BSC6900 compares the busy
and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
statistics result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08 and GSM
Rec. 08.58.
Threshold used for interference measurement.
The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, and
calculates and reports the interference on each of the idle channels. This helps the
BSC6900 to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the
interference signals are classified into five interference levels. The values of these levels are called interference band thresholds. The
BTS determines the current interference level based on these thresholds, and then reports a
radio resource indication message to the BSC6900. The BSC6900 compares the busy
and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band
statistics result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08 and GSM
Rec. 08.58.
Period during which interference levels are averaged. The interference levels on idle
channels are averaged before the BTS sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC6900. The averaging result is used for classifying the interference levels on idle channels into five interference bands. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and
12.21.
This parameter specifies whether the reselection from 2G cells to 3G cells is
allowed.
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
0~31 None 1
0~63 dB 30
500~60000 ms None
500~60000 ms 10000
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO
500~60000 ms 10000
NO, YES None NO
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None 255.255.255.255
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
None IP_OVER_FE/GE Type of the physical IP transmission medium
None None
This parameter specifies whether the handover from 3G cells to 2G cells is allowed.
Whether to reserve resources for the incoming BSC handover on the Iur-g interface
This parameter specifies whether the handover from 2G cells to 3G cells is allowed.
Frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3 of an extension
measurement report
Lower threshold of the overlay level during underlay-to-overlay handovers. When the receive level of an MS is higher than this threshold, the MS can be switched to the
overlay subcell.
The timer is used to set the time when the BSC6900 waits for an Internal Handover
Command message after a Internal Handover Required message is reported in an internal BSC handover when A interface is IP. If the
timer expires, the internal BSC handover fails.
Timer started after the BSC6900 delivers a handover command in an intra-BSC inter-cell
handover. If the BSC6900 receives a handover complete message before this timer expires, the timer stops. If this timer expires,
the BSC6900 considers the handover as failed.
Whether to allow AMR handovers. This parameter has no impact on dynamic non-
AMR F-H handovers.
This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced intra-cell handover is not subject to this parameter.
Timer started after the BSC6900 delivers a handover command in an intra-BSC intra-cell
handover. If the BSC6900 receives a handover complete message before this timer expires, the timer stops. If this timer expires,
the BSC6900 considers the handover as failed.
Whether a measurement report can contain the information about a cell with an invalid BSIC. The cell with an invalid BSIC is an
unconfigured neighboring cell.
IP address of a BTS port. It cannot be the same as any IP address configured in the
BSC6900.
It must be the valid address of the A, B, or C type and cannot be the broadcast address or
network address.
It must be the valid address of the A, B, or C type and cannot be the broadcast address or
network address.
IP_OVER_FE/GE, IP_OVER_E1
IP_OVER_FE/GE, IP_OVER_E1
Type of IP physical transmission cable medium, E1 or FE/GE.
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None None
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None None
NO, YES None NO
YES, NO None NO
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None None
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO ISSUPERBTS
NO, YES None NO
Whether to enable the heater.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether the cell is a chain neighboring cell. The parameter is used in the quick handover algorithm. Quick handover aims to increase the handover success rate of an MS moving
at a high speed and to ensure the call continuity and low call drop rate. Quick
handover applies to the scenario where an MS moves fast along an urban backbone road, a selected route, or a high-speed railroad. The target cell must be a chain
neighboring cell.
Whether to support clock server redundancy configuration
Whether to support clock server redundancy configuration
Whether to enable the BTS to support ring networking. IP BTS does not support this
parameter.
If this parameter is set to "YES", the check threshold for a specific board is used. In this case, the following paramters are involved: Forward Bandwidth, Receive Bandwidth,
Power Class, TRX Number. If this parameter is set to "NO", the check threshold for a
certain class of boards is used.
A service support attribute of a cell, that is, whether an external GSM cell supports EDGE
A service support attribute of a cell, that is, whether an external GSM cell supports GPRS
Whether to enable the TRX to carry the main BCCH in the cell
Whether this location group is the main location group. If the value is Yes, this
location group is the main location group. If the value is No, this location group is the
slave location group.
A service support attribute of a cell, that is, whether an external GSM cell supports NC2
Whether to enable the BTS to support local switching
If the BTS supports local switching, when the calling and called MSs are both within the BTS or BTS group, the voice signals are looped back to the MSs within the BTS or
BTS group instead of being sent over the Abis interface to the BSC and MSC. In this way,
the Abis resources between the convergence BTS and the BSC are released and saved.
NO, YES None NO
1~30 None None
TRUE, FALSE None None Used for parameter control
0~65535 None 65535 Value of a reserved parameter for cells
None NONE
None CONVERT0
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 8
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 10
Whether to control the temperature difference between the air inlet and air outlet and that between the air outlet and ambient by the
temperature control system.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Reserved parameter for cells. There are 30 parameters of this type, which can be used as
new parameters in later versions.
OVERLAID, UNDERLAID, NONE
Concentric cell attributes of TRX. If the cell where a TRX is located is configured as a
concentric cell, set this parameter to OVERLAID or UNDERLAID as required. If the cell where a TRX is located is not configured as a concentric cell, the default value of this
parameter is NONE.
CONVERT0, CONVERT1, CONVERT2, CONVERT3
Conversion policy of the dynamic channel of the concentric cell
The triggering of concentric circle handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when P out of N measurement reports meet the condition for concentric circle handovers, a concentric circle handover is triggered. This parameter
corresponds to the P in the P/N criteria.
The triggering of concentric circle handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when P out of N measurement reports meet the condition for concentric circle handovers, a concentric circle handover is triggered. This parameter
corresponds to the N in the P/N criteria.
None Normal_cell
DISABLE, ENABLE None None
1~255, (step: 20) ms None
0~63 dB 0
1~65533, 65535 None None
1~65533, 65535 None None
Normal_cell, Concentric_cell, EDB_cell
Whether a cell is a normal cell, concentric cell, or enhanced dual band network cell.In a concentric cell, the coverage areas of different TRXs form concentric circles of
different radiuses.Owing to different coverage areas of the
overlaid and underlaid parts, the two parts can be logically regarded as two cells. With
many channels, the overlaid part is the major traffic bearer layer, recruiting most MSs in its coverage area. The underlaid part is used for
coverage, providing services for the areas that the overlaid part cannot cover. The
underlaid part covers the overlaid part, and thus the underlaid part can also share some
traffic.An enhanced dual band network is
amelioration to the existing dual band network. In such a network, two cells
physically with a collocation site but different coverage areas form a cell group logically,
namely, an inner cell and an extra cell. Channel resource sharing and cell load
balancing is realized in the two cells through the algorithm of enhanced dual band network.
Whether to enable the LAPD Jitter Buffer algorithm. This algorithm adds a buffering
adaptation layer under the LAPD layer at the receiving end. The function at this layer is to
delay the I frame (first received, last sent) currently received. If an I frame is received
within the delayed duration, the frame is sent to the LAPD layer. In this way, the frame
disorder is avoided.
Default receive delay of the PS Jitter Buffer on the BTS. A greater value of this parameter indicates a longer end-to-end delay for the PS
service.
K offset used in K sequencing. To reduce ping-pong handovers, the system performs K sorting based on the downlink receive level of the candidate cells. But before doing that, the
system subtracts "K Bias" from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells.
Location area code (LAC). MSs can freely move in the local location area with no need
of location update. Reasonable local allocation can effectively lighten the signaling
load and improve the call completion rate.Can be input in hexadecimal format. The hexadecimal format is H'****, for example,
H'1214.
Location area code (LAC). The MS can move within the local location area without location update. The reasonable classification of the location area is very important for reducing the signaling load and improving the put-
through rate.
1~5 characters degree None
0~90 degree None
0~90 degree None
0~59 minute None
0~9 second None
0~59 second None
1, 2, 3, 4 None 3
1, 2, 3, 4 None 3
0~100 None 0
NO, YES, NONE None YES
NO, YES None YES
Decimal value when the latitude where a cell is located is indicated in the format of degree
Decimal value when the longitude where a cell is located is indicated in the format of
degree
Integer value when the latitude where a cell is located is indicated in the format of degree
Value of the minute part when the latitude is indicated in the format of degree_minute_second
Decimal value of the second part when the latitude is indicated in the format of
degree_minute_second
Integer value of the second part when the latitude is indicated in the format of
degree_minute_second
Layer where a cell is located. The network designed by Huawei has four layers: Umbrella (layer 4), Macro (layer 3), Micro (layer 2), and Pico(layer 1). Each layer can be set with 16
priorities.
A network basically consists of four layers, namely, Umbrella, Macro, Micro, and Pico.
Cell priorities influence the sorting of neighboring cells during handovers as well as
handover algorithms including PBGT and inter-layer handovers. For example, PBGT handovers can only occur among cells on a
same layer and of a same priority level. If you assign different layers and priorities to a
1800-M cell and a 900-M cell, PBGT handovers from the 1800-M cell to the 900-M
cell will not occur. This causes slow handovers even when the receive quality is
good.
When the load of the serving cell reaches the threshold, the inter-layer handover algorithm
takes effect. Through configuration of the parameter, the handover to a lower-layer cell for load-sharing is performed only when the
load of the serving cell reaches a certain level.
Whether to support the reporting of the main diversity level
Whether to allow inter-layer and inter-level handovers. The inter-layer and inter-level
handover algorithm is achieved through the setting of different layers and priorities for
cells, which switches traffic to cells of a higher precedence (decided by "Layer of the cell"
and "Cell priority" together).
0~63 dB 2
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 6
0~99 None 10
1~8 characters None None
0~40 V 35
40~80 V 45
0~100 per cent 80
0~1000 None 100 Load current shunt coefficient
NO, YES None NO
Hysteresis value during the handovers between cells on different layers or of
different priorities. This value is used to suppress inter-layer ping-pong handovers.
Inter-layer handover threshold of the serving cell = "Inter-layer HO threshold" - "Inter-layer
HO Hysteresis"; Inter-layer handover threshold of a
neighboring cell = "Inter-layer HO threshold" + "Adjacent Cell Inter-layer HO Hysteresis" - 64.
The triggering of inter-layer handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when the
condition for inter-layer handovers is met for a consecutive P seconds during N seconds, an
inter-layer handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to the P in the P/N
criteria.
The triggering of inter-layer handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when the
condition for inter-layer handovers is met for a consecutive P seconds during N seconds, an
inter-layer handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to the N in the P/N
criteria.
Lower humidity threshold for the environment alarm box to report an alarm indicating that
the ambient humidity is too low. If the ambient humidity of the BTS is lower than this
threshold, the environment alarm box reports the alarm.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in this mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Lower limit of an alarm. It is valid for the analog port.
Upper threshold of the low noise amplifier. When the working voltage of the low noise
amplifier attenuator in the RXU board is smaller than this value, an alarm is reported
by the BTS.
Lower threshold of the low noise amplifier. When the working voltage of the low noise
amplifier attenuator in the RXU board is greater than this value, an alarm is reported
by the BTS.
If the load of a cell is lower than the value of this parameter, the cell can admit the users
handed over from other cells with higher load. Otherwise, the cell rejects such users.
This parameter specifies whether to use the load handover or the enhanced load
handover.
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
-64dB ~ 63dB None 0
0~255 s 10
0~63 dB 63
This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion,
improve success rate of channel assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover is used as an emergency measure
instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and
the network layout should be adjusted.
Indicates that if a 2G neighboring cell supports load handovers, the BSC adds the
load information of the local cells in the signaling procedures related to this
neighboring cell.
Indicates that if a 3G neighboring cell supports load handovers, the BSC adds the
load information of the local cells in the signaling procedures related to this
neighboring cell.
If the path loss in the serving cell minus that in a handover candidate cell is not smaller
than the parameter value, the handover to the candidate cell is allowed. The parameter
loosens the requirement of the PBGT handover threshold when the load of the
serving cell reaches a certain level. Some traffic that could not be handed over to a
neighboring cell through the PBGT handover can be handed over now. The value "0"
indicates that the enhanced load handover to the neighboring cell is not allowed.
After a load handover succeeds, the BSC punishes the former serving cell during
"Penalty Time on Load HO" by subtracting "Penalty Value on Load HO" from the receive level of the former serving cell, thus avoiding
ping-pong handovers.
After a load handover succeeds, the BSC punishes the former serving cell during
"Penalty Time on Load HO" by subtracting "Penalty Value on Load HO" from the receive level of the former serving cell, thus avoiding
ping-pong handovers.
1~255 s 10
1~63 dB 5
1~16 None 3
0~63 dB 25
NO, YES None NO
FORBID, PERMIT None PERMIT
0~63 None 40
When the load of a cell reaches or exceeds "Load HO Threshold", all the calls that are using this cell as the serving cell generate handover requests at the same time, which
will suddenly increase the load of the processor. Under some circumstances,
congestion occurs in the cell, which will result in call drop. To solve this problem, the BSC
uses the hierarchical load handover algorithm to control the number of users included in
each level of handovers. This parameter indicates the duration of each
handover level.
In hierarchical load handovers, starting from "Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold", a "Load
HO Step Level" is added to the upper handover threshold after every "Load HO
Step Period". In this way, all the calls in the current serving cell whose receive level is in the range "Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold" to "Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold" + "Load HO Bandwidth" are switched to other cells.
This parameter specifies the ratio of the MSs that simultaneously perform a load handover.
You can enlarge the ratio to accelerate the handover to a neighboring cell for load
sharing. Too large a ratio, however, causes the neighboring cell to be congested. When a
neighboring cell is congested, you need to reduce the ratio to a reasonable value.
In the handover algorithm of the first generation, load handovers can be performed
only when the receive level of the current serving cell is in the range "Edge HO DL
RX_LEV Threshold" to "Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold" + "Load HO Bandwidth".
In the handover algorithm of the second generation, load handovers can be performed
only when the level difference between the neighboring cell and the serving cell is
between "Inter-cell HO Hysteresis" - "Load HO Bandwidth" and "Inter-cell HO
Hysteresis".
Whether to enable load power-off.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to allow the cell load reselection. If this parameter is set to PERMIT and "NC2 Load Reselection Switch" is set to Support, the load of the target cell is involved in the
algorithm for NC2 cell reselection.
Threshold for allowing the MS to reselect a cell during load reelection. When the receive
level of the serving cell is lower than this threshold, the load reselection is triggered.
0~100 per cent 60
0~100 per cent 85
NO, YES None YES
None DYNPDCHASIDLE
OFF, ON None None TRM load threshold switch
1~5 characters degree None
0~180 degree None
0~180 degree None
0~59 minute None
0~9 second None
0~59 second None
0~100 per cent 80
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
OFF, ON None ON
OFF, ON None OFF
When the uplink load or downlink load of the target cell is lower than this threshold, it can accept the MSs from the serving cell due to
load reselection.
When the uplink load or downlink load of the cell exceeds this threshold, the load
reselection decision is made.
If this parameter is set to YES, the channel assignment algorithm II randomly selects the start range for channel traversal; otherwise, the algorithm selects the channel next to the channel assigned last time as the start point
of channel traversal.
NOTSTADYNPDCH, DYNPDCHASOCCUPY,
DYNPDCHASIDLE
This parameter specifies whether the dynamic PDCHs that have been converted into the
PDCHs are considered during the calculation of the current cell load.
Decimal value when the longitude where a cell is located is indicated in the format of
degree
Value of the degree part when the latitude is indicated in the format of degree_minute_second
Integer value when the longitude where a cell is located is indicated in the format of degree
Value of the minute part when the longitude is indicated in the format of degree_minute_second
Decimal value of the second part when the longitude is indicated in the format of
degree_minute_second
Integer value of the second part when the longitude is indicated in the format of
degree_minute_second
When the load of an SDCCH on the TRX that is in loose frequency reuse and is in the
compatible band of the BCCH is lower than this threshold, the SDCCH is preferably
allocated.
Whether to permit the preemption of lower-level sublink resources. If the value of this
parameter is YES, a CS domain service can preempt the sublink resources of the PS
domain services on the lower-level BTS of the cascaded BTSs when the CS domain service
fails to preempt the sublink of the corresponding level.
The CS services are preferred. This parameter indicates that the CS services are
permitted to preempt the dynamic Abis resources on the sublink of the current level
site.
Whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass
Whether to assign overlay channels in an IUO cell based on the receive level conditions
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
IR, LA None IR
DISABLE, ENABLE None DISABLE
35.0~55.6 (step: 0.1) V None
Whether to power off the TRX in the case of overlow temperature of the BTS cabinet. If this parameter is set to "Yes", the BTS powers off the TRX and reports a "Load
Power Off Alarm" to protect the TRX in the case of overlow temperature of the BTS cabinet. When the cabinet temperature
returns to 0 celsius degree, the BTS powers on the TRX, and the alarm disappears.
Whether to power off the TRX of a BTS when the temperature of the BTS cabinet is too low.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
It is applicable to the radio transmission environment to improve the link quality. Link
adaptation (LA) indicates adjusting the coding mode of the channel dynamically according to
the transmission quality of the link. The link transmission quality is measured by the 8PSK MEAN BEP and 8PSK CV BEP in the Packet EGPRS Downlink Ack/Nack message sent by
the MS. The network side determines the coding mode for data transmission according to the radio measurement report sent by the
MS. The cell with the good transmission quality on the air interface is set to the LA mode. Increment redundancy (IR) mode
requires the network side retransmit the data block with different punching codes and the
MS store the historical error information. The data block is retransmitted through
cooperated error correction function. With the IR mode, the transmission quality on the air
interface of the cell can be improved. However, the MS must support this IR mode.
The cell with the dissatisfied transmission quality on the air interface is set to the LR
mode.
Whether to enable power shutdown upon low voltage of the battery.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Load power-off voltage threshold. If "Load Shutdown Flag" is set to "Enable" and the load voltage is lower than the value of this
parameter, the load is automatically powered off.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
-99~70 degree Celsius 0
-99~99 degree Celsius -1
2~255 None 2
2~255 None 8
2~255 None 60
2~255 None 2
None 20
None 30
DISABLE, ENABLE None ENABLE
Temperature control threshold for low temperature. When the ambient temperature is less than "Low Temperature Critical Point",
the temperature control system needs to control the temperature difference between the air inlet and air outlet, and that between
the air inlet and ambient temperature.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Lower temperature threshold for the environment alarm box to report an alarm
indicating that the ambient temperature is too low. If the ambient temperature of the BTS is
lower than this threshold, the environment alarm box reports the alarm.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in this mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Lower voice quality threshold associated with the automatic adjustment of the AMR
handover uplink threshold;The value of this parameter must be smaller than or equal to the value of Uplink Long-term FER Target.
Target voice quality value associated with the automatic adjustment of the uplink threshold
of AMR handover
Upper voice quality threshold associated with the automatic adjustment of the AMR
handover uplink threshold
Factor of uplink threshold adjustment. It indicates the linear relation between the
threshold adjustment value and the logarithmic FER.
The level 2 Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) threshold. When the VSWR is higher
than this parameter, the TRX will report a level-2 VSWR alarm. At this time, the BTS disables power amplification and fails to
provide services.
Whether "Shutdown Voltage" is valid.In multi-mode base station scenario, the value of this parameter in different modes must be
the same for the same multi-mode base station.
None CA_MA
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO
00:00~23:59 None None
0~3, Step:0.2 dB 0
00:00~23:59 None 0:00
1~64 characters None None
1~64 characters None None Bar code 1 of the BTS interface board
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
CA_MA, Frequency_List, OPTIMIZED_CA_MA
Coding mode in which an ARFCN is sent to an MS during an assignment or handover. If
the parameter is set to CA_MA, an ARFCN is indicated through the CA and MA information
contained in an assignment or handover command. If the parameter is set to
Frequency_List, an ARFCN is indicated through the Frequency List information
contained in an assignment or handover command. If this parameter is set to
OPTIMIZED_CA_MA, the assignment command carries only the MA but not the CA
when a cell works on only one frequency band, and the assignment command carries
both the MA and CA if the cell works on more than one frequency band.
When this parameter is set to YES, the BSC6900 is allowed to reduce the transmit power of the non-BCCH timeslots on the
BCCH TRX.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Enhanced BCCH Power Consumption Optimization feature. Generally, the BCCH
TRX transmits signals at the maximum transmit power. When this parameter is set to YES, the BSC6900 is allowed to reduce the
transmit power of the non-BCCH idle timeslots on the BCCH TRX.
This parameter specifies the end time of the period during which the power of the non-
BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX is derated.
This parameter specifies the range of power derating over the non-BCCH timeslots on the
BCCH TRX.
This parameter specifies the start time of the period during which the power of the non-
BCCH timeslots on the BCCH TRX is derated.
Bar code 1 of the interface board of the BTS. This parameter is the electronic serial number of the active PTU board. An electronic serial
number uniquely identifies an PTU board. This parameter is set before delivery.
Mobile allocation index offset 1. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 10. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 11. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 12. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0~11 None None
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None 255.255.255.255 IP subnet mask of a BTS port
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None Subnet mask of BTS PPP link.
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None Subnet mask of BTS MLPPP Group.
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
0~32 dB 8
1~20 None 3
0~20 dB 10
Mobile allocation index offset 2. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 3. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 4. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 5. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 6. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 7. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 8. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
Mobile allocation index offset 9. Start frequency number, which is the number of the
frequency where frequency hopping starts
IP address of the main clock server. It must be a legal A/B/C type address but not a broadcast address or network address.
It must be the valid address of the A, B, or C type and cannot be the broadcast address or
network address.
Step of upward power adjustment according to the quality of the received signals
Number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed in a cell. When the interval between
two intra-cell handovers is lower than a certain time threshold, these two intra-cell
handovers are considered consecutive. When a certain number of intra-cell handovers occur
consecutively, intra-cell handovers will be disallowed in the cell for a certain period of
time.
This parameter specifies the largest step of each TRX power reduction.
1~2 None 1
1~2 None 1
100~100000 (step: 100) W 125 Maximum output power of the diesel
0~8 None 8
0~100 per cent 30
Maximum number of TRXs that can be configured for one cell. For the BTS3900B GSM, when the "Frequency and BSIC Plan Switch" is ON, the "Maximum TRX Number" (one or two, one by default) can be selected. For the BTS3900E GSM, when the "Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch" is OFF, the
"Maximum TRX Number" (one or two, one by default) can be selected.
Maximum number of TRXs that can be configured for one cell. For the BTS3900B GSM, when the "Frequency and BSIC Plan Switch" is ON, the "Maximum TRX Number" (one or two, one by default) can be selected. For the BTS3900E GSM, when the "Capacity and Coverage Optimize Switch" is OFF, the
"Maximum TRX Number" (one or two, one by default) can be selected.
Maximum number of PDCHs that can be assigned in the TRX
Maximum value of the PDCH ratio in a cell. The number of available TCHs and PDCHs in a cell is set to a fixed value. The PDCH ratio is: Number of available PDCHs/(Number of
available TCHFs + Number of available static PDCHs). This parameter is used to restrict
Maximum current coefficient when the battery is charged. When the battery is charged, the
maximum current can be 0.01 to 0.99 times of the capacity of the battery cabinet. That is, the charge coefficient is 0.01-0.99. For example, if the capacity of the battery cabinet is 200 A
and the charge coefficient is 0.15, the maximum charge current for the battery
cabinet is 30 A.
5C, 7C, 10C, 12C, 15C, 18C, 20C, 22C, 25C
Maximum current coefficient when the battery is charged. When the battery is charged, the
maximum current can be 0.05 to 0.25 times of the capacity of the battery cabinet. That is, the charge coefficient is 0.05-0.25. For example, if the capacity of the battery cabinet is 200 A
and the charge coefficient is 0.15, the maximum charge current for the battery
cabinet is 30 A.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
1~255 None 30
None 7_Times
None 7_Times
None 7_Times
None 7_Times
0~30 dB 2
Maximum times for a Physical Information message to be transmitted. When the
retransmission times exceeds this parameter and the BTS still cannot receive any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends a connection failure message (including the handover failure information) to the BSC, which releases the assigned channel and
stops timer T3105 after receiving this message.
In a non-synchronized handover, an MS keeps sending Handover Access Burst
messages (usually, the value of timer T3124 is 320 ms) to the network. When detecting
these messages, the BTS returns a Physical Information message to the MS through the main DCCH (FACCH) channel, starts timer
T3105, and sends a MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the
BSC. The BTS includes the information of different
physical layers in the Physical Information message, thus ensuring correct traffic
transmission for the MS. If the timer timeouts before a SAMB frame is received from the
MS, the BTS retransmits the Physical Information message to the MS.
For details, see protocols 08.58 and 04.08.
1_Times, 2_Times, 4_Times, 7_Times
Maximum retransmission for radio priority 1. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by
the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1
is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
1_Times, 2_Times, 4_Times, 7_Times
Maximum retransmission for radio priority 2. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by
the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1
is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
1_Times, 2_Times, 4_Times, 7_Times
Maximum retransmission for radio priority 3. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by
the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1
is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
1_Times, 2_Times, 4_Times, 7_Times
Maximum retransmission for radio priority 4. The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by
the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1
is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.
Huawei power control algorithm II divides three quality zones according to the quality of
the receive signals. When the power is downwardly adjusted according to the level,
the maximum downward adjustment step can vary according to the quality of the received
signals. This parameter specifies the maximum step of downward power
adjustment when the quality of the received signals falls into quality zone 0.
0~30 dB 0
0~30 dB 0
0~255 None 62
0~31 None 20
OFF, ON None OFF
0~255 None 255
0~32 None 32
0~32 dB 8
0~3 None 0
ms 2
Huawei power control algorithm II divides three quality zones according to the quality of
the receive signals. When the power is downwardly adjusted according to the level,
the maximum downward adjustment step can vary according to the quality of the received
signals. This parameter specifies the maximum step of downward power
adjustment when the quality of the received signals falls into quality zone 1.
Huawei power control algorithm II divides three quality zones according to the quality of
the receive signals. When the power is downwardly adjusted according to the level,
the maximum downward adjustment step can vary according to the quality of the received
signals. This parameter specifies the maximum step of downward power
adjustment when the quality of the received signals falls into quality zone 2.
This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel
request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the
channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter. The value of this parameter is determined by that of "Cell Extension Type"
in the "ADD GCELL" command.
Number of measurement reports (MRs) used for averaging the time advance before the call
drops
Whether to initiate a forcible call drop when the time advance exceeds "MAX TA Drop
Call Threshold"
Whether the time advance after filtering exceeds the threshold. If the threshold is exceeded, a forcible call drop is initiated.
Maximum number of (16 kbit/s) Abis timeslots that the PDCHs can use in the TRX
Step of upward power adjustment according to the quality of the received signals
Used for requesting the MS to report the measurement information of neighboring cells in multiple frequency bands. This parameter is carried in the system information 2ter and
5ter.
TCH:0~14880, step:480; SDCCH:0~14570,
step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of enhanced measurement reports received on a signaling
channel used to measure the MEAN_BEP value.
ms 6
3 digit None None
1~3 characters None None
None 8 Number of MC prioritie levels.
ON, OFF None OFF
None CLASS0 Standard for the GSM multi-carrier BTS
NO, YES None NO
None ComMeasReport
LONG, SHORT None LONG
0~63 None 15
0~49 dB 10
0~63 dB 0
TCH:0~14880, step:480; SDCCH:0~14570,
step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of enhanced measurement reports received on a voice channel used to measure the MEAN_BEP
value.
Mobile country code. This parameter identifies the country where a mobile
subscriber is located, for example, the Chinese MCC is 460.
Local mobile country code (MCC). It is used to identify the country that the mobile
subscriber belongs to. For example, the MCC of China is 460.
4(Use two bytes to present MC priority number, 4
classes), 8(Use four bytes to present MC priority number, 8 classes)
If the MCPA Optimization Switch is turned on, the MCPA priority update mode is adjusted.
CLASS0, CLASS1, CLASS2
Whether to allow the MS to the send the PS measurement report to the network side
EnhMeasReport, ComMeasReport
Type of the measurement report (MR) reported by the MS
Frame encapsulation format supported by MP/MC.
Minimum receive level for a neighbor cell to become a candidate cell during cell
reselection. When the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the value of this parameter, it indicates that the normal cell reselection level is bad. In this case, the
parameter value is used for the calculation of the times of the occurrence of bad normal cell
reselection level.
Selects 3G candidate cells. If the measured value of a 3G neighboring cell is lower than
this threshold, the 3G neighboring cell will be removed from among the 3G candidate cells.
Minimum receive level offset.An MS can be handed over to a neighboring
cell only when the downlink level of the neighboring cell is greater than the sum of "Min DL level on candidate Cell" and the
value of this parameter.
0~63 dB 16
60~3600 s 60
0~63 dB 10
2~3 digit None None
1~64 characters None None
0~12 None None
0~600 m/s 35
None MODE4_1
DISABLE, ENABLE None ENABLE Is Support MCPPP.
In a direct retry, when the receive level of a neighboring cell is no smaller than this
parameter, the neighboring cell can be a candidate cell for the direct retry. The
parameter is invalid in handover algorithm II.
Minimum time required for a TCH to transform to a SDCCH and then transform
back to a TCH
Selects 3G candidate cells. If the measured value of a 3G neighboring cell is lower than
this threshold, the 3G neighboring cell will be removed from among the 3G candidate cells.
Mobile network code. This parameter identifies the public land mobile network
(PLMN) to which a mobile subscriber belongs.
Mobile network code (MNC). It is used to identify the PLMN that the mobile subscriber
belongs to.
Month when the TMU board software is released
A quick handover can be initiated only if the rate of an MS is higher than this parameter
of the BTS. In the case of physical multiplexing on a 16 kbit/s timeslot, the OML works at 16 kbit/s. In this case, the OML uses
a 16 kbit/s timeslot.ESL: extended signaling link of the BTS. If the
BTS supports Flex Abis, in the case of statistical multiplexing on a 64 kbit/s timeslot, a 64 kbit/s timeslot needs to be assigned to
the ESL. In this case, the ESL is always multiplexed with the OML in the 64 kbit/s
timeslot. In the case of physical multiplexing on a 16 kbit/s timeslot, no timeslot is assigned to the ESL. In this case, the ESL shares the
same timeslot with the OML. RSL: radio signaling layer link in each TRX. Each TRX has one RSL link. In the case of
statistical multiplexing on a 64 kbit/s timeslot, the RSL link works at 64kbit/s. In this case,
the RSL link can be multiplexed only with the signaling links in the same cabinet group of the BTS. In the case of physical multiplexing on a 16 kbit/s timeslot, the RSL link works at 16 kbit/s. In this case, the RSL link uses a 16
kbit/s timeslot exclusively.TCH: traffic channels in each TRX. The TCH
works at 16 kbit/s.Idle: idle timeslots of the BTS. An idle timeslot
works at 16 kbit/s. In the case of statistical multiplexing on a 64 kibt/s timeslot, the idle timeslots can be multiplexed only with the
TCHs in the same cabinet group onto one 64 kbit/s timeslot.
Semi: monitoring timeslots of the BTS. The monitoring timeslots work at 8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s,
32 kbit/s, and 64 kbit/s. The monitoring timeslots can be multiplexed only with semi-
permanent links.
NO, YES None YES
0~31 None 4
1~255 None 5
None Once_ps
4~30 dB 4
4~30 dB 4
128~1500 None 1500
OFF, ON None OFF
None R98_or_below
5000~40000 ms 15000 Call reestablishment timer
NO, YES None NO
Whether power control algorithm II allows measurement report compensation.
When making a power control decision, the BSC retrieves a certain number of history
measurement reports and performs weighted filtering on the receive level values and
receive quality values in these reports, which may be obtained when different transmit powers were used by BTSs or MSs. To
ensure that correct receive level values and receive quality values are used in filtering,
you must compensate the receive level values and receive quality values in history
measurement reports obtained when transmit powers different than the current one were
used.
If the number of measurement reports lost consecutively is no larger than this value,
linear interpolation is performed for the values in the lost measurement reports based on the
values in the two measurement reports preceding and following the lost measurement
reports. Otherwise, the lost measurement reports will be discarded, and the value will be recalculated when new measurement reports
arrive.
When the number of the lost measurement reports exceeds this parameter during a
power control period, the power control stops.
NOreport, Twice_ps, Once_ps, Once_2s,
Once_4s
Frequency at which the BTSs submit pre-processed measurement reports to the BSC
Attenuation factor for the TMA of antenna tributary 1
Attenuation factor for the TMA of antenna tributary 2
Maximum length of a received packet. The value of this parameter is negotiated at both
ends of a communication.
Whether to collect the information about the MSs of different capabilities in a cell. This
parameter has no impact on services.
R98_or_below, R99_or_above
Protocol version of the MSC that is connected to the BSC6900. The supported signaling
varies with the protocol versions.
Whether to enable "Triggering the quick PBGT algorithm only when an MS is far from
the BTS"
None 4_Times
None MCS5
10~80 None 40
0~63 dB 10
0~255 None 200
0~31 None 2
0~1500 None 1500
19.0~24.0, step:0.1 V 225 Bus voltage of the battery rack of the BTS
1_Times, 2_Times, 4_Times, 7_Times
Maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an
immediate assignment procedure. After the MS initiates the immediate
assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common
control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs. If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, it retransmits Channel Request messages at a specified
interval. If the downlink quality is poor, the MS may
Threshold of the MS Receiver Diversity (MSRD) mode
PDCH Downlink multiplex threshold in the Mobile Station Receiver Diversity (MSRD)
mode. When this parameter is set to "80", the MS does not adopt the MSRD mode. When the number of the TBF on the PDCH that is
assigned to the MS exceeds this parameter or the coding rate of the PDCH is smaller than
the threshold of the coding rate in MSRD mode, the MS is required to adopt the MSRD
mode.
The M criteria supports setting minimum values for the downlink receive level of
neighboring cells. The M criteria is met only when ,
Estimated downlink level of neighboring cells >= ("Min DL level on candidate Cell" + "Min
Access Level Offset")Estimated uplink level of neighboring cells >=
("Min UL level on candidate Cell" + "Min Access Level Offset")
When the number of received measurement reports on the downlink transmission quality
(Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message) is greater than or equal to this threshold,
emergency reselection decision is made.
Maximum TX power for the MS to access the PCH
Maximum size of a packet that can be transmitted or received on a FE port.
None REPORT6
0~255 s None
DISABLE, ENABLE None None
0~10 s None
0~15 min 0
NO, YES None NO
0~12 None 6
1~3 None 3
5~254 None 5
REPORT6, REPORT1, REPORT2, REPORT3
Multi-band point report value, including "report six cells with the strongest signal at each frequency point", "report one cell with the
strongest signal at each frequency point","report two cells with the strongest
signal at each frequency point", and "report three cells with the strongest signal at each
frequency point".
Period of performing class-1 mute detection. If the bad frame rate reaches "Bad Frame
Threshold of Mute Detection Class 1" within the period specified by this parameter, mute
speech may be detected. The setting of "Mute Detection Class 2 Switch" determines whether to perform the class-2 mute
detection.
Whether the one-way audio problem is checked in class-2 detection. In this manner, the one-way audio problems found in class-1
are checked to ensure the accuracy.
Period of performing the class-2 mute detection. After the BTS or TC initiates a
class-2 mute detection request, the class-2 mute detection fails if there is no response and no test TRAU frame is received by the
end of the period specified by this parameter; if the class-2 mute detection response is
received but no correct test TRAU frame is received, mute speech is detected; if the class-2 mute detection response and the
expected test TRAU frame are received, the speech channel is considered to be normal.
Time for prohibiting the call from accessing the corresponding channel where one-way
audio is detected on the Abis interface.
Whether to forcibly release a call after the forced handover fails in the case of one-way
audio on the Abis interface
Minimum number of reserved working status TRXs of the cabinet
System parameter in the LAPD protocol. The value of this parameter specifies the
maximum number of times when a frame is retransmitted.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the
BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter indicates the maximum number of
retransmissions of the I frame.For the function of N200 and the effect of the
parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
34~254 None 34
29~254 None 29
OFF, ON None OFF
5~254 None 5
5~254 None 5
23~254 None 23
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the
BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame on the FACCH
(a full-rate channel).For the function of N200 and the effect of the
parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the
BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame on the FACCH
(a half-rate channel).For the function of N200 and the effect of the
parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
Whether the BSC6900 sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.
If this parameter is set to YES, the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to NO, the BSC6900 does
not send the LAPDm N200 parameter.
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the
BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter indicates the maximum number of
retransmissions of the I frame during the multi-frame release.
For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the description of "T200
SDCCH".
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the
BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame on the SACCH.For the function of N200 and the effect of the
parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the
BTS should resend the I frame. This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame on the SDCCH.For the function of N200 and the effect of the
parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
8~30 None 20
2~5 None 3
3~10 None 10
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
0~15 None 2
Maximum value of the N3101 counter. In the dynamic uplink allocation mode, the network side enables multiple MSs to share the same uplink channel through the USF value in the downlink data block. After the network side
allocates the USF to the uplink TBF (the uplink TBF is set up successfully), N3101 is started. The network side waits for the RLC uplink data block sent by the MS. If the RLC
uplink data block sent by the MS is valid, N3101 is reset. Otherwise, the value of N3101 is increased on the network side.
When this counter is overflowed, the current uplink TBF is released abnormally.
Maximum value of the N3101 counter. When the uplink transmission ends, if the network side receives the last RLC data block, the
network side sends an FAI=1 uplink packet acknowledged/unacknowledged message
and starts N3103. If the packet control acknowledgement message is not received in the specified time, N3103 is increased on the
network side and the uplink packet acknowledged/unacknowledged message is
retransmitted. When this counter is overflowed, the timer T3169 is started. After
this timer expires, the current TBF is released abnormally.
Maximum value of the N3105 counter. After the downlink TBF is set up successfully, the N3105 is started on the network side. After the downlink RLC data block is added with the RRBP domain on the network side, the
valid packet acknowledged message responded by the MS is received in the uplink RLC data block in the RRBP domain. In this case, N3105 is reset. Otherwise, the value of
N3105 is increased and the downlink data block of the RRBP is retransmitted. When
N3105 is overflowed, T3195 is started. After the timer T3195 expires, the current TBF is
released abnormally.
Whether to support the network assisted cell change (NACC). The NACC is used in the network control modes NC0, NC1 or NC2.
The NACC enables the network to notify the MS of the system information of the
neighboring cell when the MS is in the packet transmission state. In this way, the MS can
reselect a cell in a shorter time.
Whether to preferentially allocate loose multiplexing frequencies to non-AMR users
Filter consistent of the collision signal strength of power control. When sampling must be performed (NAVGI) times before the MS obtains the efficient measurement signal.
DISABLE, ENABLE None DISABLE
0~5047 None None
1~64 characters None None Name of neighboring GSM cell 1
0~5047 None None
1~64 characters None None Name of neighboring GSM cell 2
0~5047 None None
1~64 characters None None Name of a cell
5048~8047 None None
1~64 characters None None Name of a neighboring cell
OFF, ON None None
0~65535 None None Cell ID of a neighboring cell
1~65533, 65535 None None Local Area Code (LAC) of a neighboring cell
1~3 characters None None
1~3 characters None None
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
0~7 None None
Whether to enable the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function on the BTS through
a CHANNEL ACTIVATION or MODE MODIFY message. This parameter specifies
whether to enable the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function. If the voice quality of an ongoing MS-to-MS call is bad, the TFO function can be enabled to improve end-to-end voice quality. The TFO function cannot be used to improve the voice quality of an
MS-to-PSTN call.
Uniform number of neighboring cell 1 index within a BSC6900, which uniquely identifies a
cell and is in the range 0 to 5047.
Index of neighboring GSM cell 2. Uniform number of a cell index within a BSC6900,
which uniquely identifies a cell and is in the range 0 to 5047.
Uniform number of a cell index within a BSC6900
, which uniquely identifies a cell.
Uniform number of a neighboring cell index within a BSC, which uniquely identifies a cell.The value range of the index of a 3G external
cell is 5048 to 8047.
When this switch is on, it indicates that the data of the adjacent cell is generated
automatically. When this switch is off, it indicates that these data must be configured
manually.
Mobile Country Code (MCC) of a neighboring cell
Mobile Network Code (MNC) of a neighboring cell
Whether the PCU of the cell supports the 64 neighboring cells.
This parameter determines the capability of reporting the number of the neighboring cells of the BSC in the NACC and NC2 function.
Whether to support the network control 2 (NC2). The NC2 enables the network side to control the cell reselection for the MS when
the MS reports the measurement report of the local cell and the neighboring cell.When this
parameter is set to "YES" and "Network Control Mode" in "SET GCELLPSBASE" is
set to "NC2", the network side can control the cell reselection for the MS.
Network color code that is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify
networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide.
The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.
0~7 None None
None
0~255 None 1
ms 4
ms 4
0~7 None 0
0~7 None 0
NC0, NC1, NC2 None NC0
0~60 s 4
Network color code. It is used to uniquely identify different public land mobile network
A set of NCCs of the cells to be measured by the MS. This parameter is an information
element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages.
If a bit of the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding
measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit
maps with an NCC (0~7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS does not measure the cell level of
NCC N.
NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. The MS reports only the NCC
bitmap of the BSIC and the cell measurement report that matches the bitmap.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of measurement reports used for the filtering of
neighboring cell information.
TCH:480~14880, step:480;
SDCCH:470~14570, step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of measurement reports used for the filtering of
neighboring cell signal strength.
Number of blocks occupied by the NCH in the group call service
Number of the start block occupied by the NCH in the group call service
Network control mode for cell reselection of the MS. There are three modes. NC0: normal
MS control. The MS shall perform autonomous cell re-selection. NC1: MS
control with measurement reports. The MS shall send measurement reports to the
network and the MS shall perform autonomous cell re-selection. NC2: network
control. The MS shall send measurement reports to the network . The MS shall only
perform autonomous cell re-selection when the reselection is triggered by a downlink
signaling failure or a random access failure.When this parameter is set to NC2 and "Support NC2" in "SET GCELLGPRS" is set
to "YES", the network side can control the cell reselection for the MS.
Minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers performed by an MS. During this interval, no emergency handover
is allowed.
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None IP address of the next hop
NMOI, NMOII, NMOIII None NMOII
NO, YES None NO
0~255 dB 2
0~255 dB 30
0~255 dB 1
0~255 dB 95
0~7 None 0
0~100 per cent 85
0~255 dB 14
0~255 dB 103
NO, YES None NO
This parameter is related to the paging channel of the system. There are three
network operation modes: network operation mode I, network operation mode II, and
network operation mode III. Network operation mode I is used when the system is
configured with the Gs interface. Network operation mode II is used when the system is not configured with the Gs interface and the PCCCH is not configured. Network operation
mode III is used when the system is not configured with the Gs interface and the
PCCCH is configured.
Whether to allow non-AMR voice F-H handover
Decides the offset of the current ATCB together with other two parameters: "F-H Ho
Period" and period of triggering a F-H handover, thus selecting target users for F-H
handovers. ATCB offset = (Period of triggering a F-H handover / "F-H Ho Period" +
1) * "Non-AMR F-H Ho ATCB Adjust Step".
When the ATCB value of non-AMR full rate voice is no smaller than this parameter, the
condition for non-AMR F-H handovers is met.
Decides the current path cost offset together with other two parameters: "F-H Ho Period"
and period of triggering a F-H handover, thus selecting target users for F-H handovers.
Path cost offset = (Period of triggering a F-H handover / "F-H Ho Period" + 1) * "Non-AMR
F-H Ho Pathloss Adjust Step".
When the path loss value of non-AMR full rate voice is no larger than this parameter, the
condition for non-AMR F-H handovers is met.
Quality threshold for non-AMR F-H handovers. When the uplink receive quality and downlink receive quality of a user are both smaller than this parameter, a F-H
handover is triggered for the user.
When the load of a cell is no smaller than this threshold, non-AMR F-H handovers are
triggered in the cell.
When the ATCB value of non-AMR half rate voice is no larger than this threshold, the
condition for non-AMR H-F handovers is met.
When the path loss value of non-AMR half rate voice is no smaller than this threshold, the condition for non-AMR H-F handovers is
met.
Whether to trigger non-AMR H-F handovers according to the uplink and downlink receive
quality
0~7 None 2
0~100 per cent 25
0~64 None 8
NO, YES None NO
0~70 None 50
1~1000 Ah 100
OFF, ON None ON
s 0.24sec Period when the cell is in the non-DRX state
FORBID, PERMIT None PERMIT
40.0~70.0 (step: 0.1) degree Celsius 500
5~1275, step:5 min 48
Quality threshold for non-AMR H-F handovers. When the receive quality of a user
is no smaller than this parameter, the user meets the condition for H-F handovers.
When the load of a cell is no larger than this threshold, non-AMR H-F handovers are
triggered in the cell.
Decisions of no-downlink measurement report handovers can be made only when the
number of consecutive no-downlink measurement reports in the current call is no
larger than this parameter.
Whether to enable the no-downlink measurement report handover algorithm
When a certain number of no-downlink measurement reports are received
consecutively and the uplink receive quality is no smaller than this parameter, no-downlink measurement report emergency handovers are triggered. No-downlink measurement report emergency handovers choose the inter-cell handover mode preferentially;
however, if no candidate cells are available and intra-cell handover is enabled in the
current cell, intra-cell handovers are triggered.
Normal output capacity of the battery group in specific discharging conditions (such as discharge rate, temperature, and final
voltage). Generally, the parameter is based on 10-hour discharge rate.
Whether to enable the III power control algorithm for Non-AMR calls. If enabled, power control is performed on Non-AMR
Whether to allow the cell normal reselection. If this parameter is set to PERMIT and "NC2 Load Reselection Switch" is set to Support, the load of the target cell is involved in the
algorithm for NC2 cell reselection.
Normal work temperature threshold of the cabinet
Maximum number of measurement periods in which there is no traffic. If the number of
measurement periods in which there is no traffic reaches this parameter, the BTS
reports an alarm indicating that there is no traffic.
10~255 s 30
ms 2
ms 6
0~65534 None None
ms 2
None None
0~30 degree Celsius 9
If the BTS works in fallback mode and uplink VGCS connection is idle for a period specified
by this parameter, the BTS disables the VGCS connection automatically. This
parameter is valid only for user-originated VGCS calls and is invalid for fixed VGCS
calls.
TCH:0~14880, step:480; SDCCH:0~14570,
step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of enhanced measurement reports received on a signaling
channel used to filter the NBR_RCVD_BLOCKS value.
TCH:0~14880, step:480; SDCCH:0~14570,
step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of enhanced measurement reports received on a service
channel used to filter the NBR_RCVD_BLOCKS value.
The identifier of a network service entity (NSE).An NSE manages a group of NSVCs.
TCH:480~14880, step:480;
SDCCH:470~14570, step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of measurement reports received on signaling channels used for the filtering of neighboring
cell signal strength.
North_latitude, South_latitude
Whether the cell is located in the south latitude or north latitude
If the inlet temperature is between "High Temperature Critical Point" and "Low
Temperature Critical Point" and the difference between the inlet temperature and the
ambient temperature reaches the value of this parameter, the temperature control system
controls the difference between the inlet and outlet temperatures as well as the difference
between the inlet temperature and the ambient temperature.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
0~30 degree Celsius 16
1~255 None 10
None None Type of the alarm shield object
OFF, ON None OFF
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO
0~96 None 1
1~16777215 None None
If the outlet temperature is between "High Temperature Critical Point" and "Low
Temperature Critical Point" and the difference between the outlet temperature and the inlet
temperature reaches the value of this parameter, the temperature control system
controls the difference between the inlet and outlet temperatures as well as the difference
between the inlet temperature and the ambient temperature.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Number of retransmissions of the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message
BTS, CELL, LOC, BOARD, PORT
When the PDCHs are insufficient, the streaming service with high priority can
preempt the PDCHs that are seized by the streaming service with low priority. After the PDCH resource preemption, the streaming service with low priority initiates the QoS
negotiation with the SGSN. If the QoS negotiation fails, or if all the PDCHs are
preempted, then the streaming service with low priority is disrupted.
Whether to allow overlay-to-underlay handovers
This parameter specifies whether to configure the backup OML. When YES is configured in the BTS, an OML is configured in timeslot 31 of port 0 and port 1 respectively. The links are established on the two ports in turn after the
BTS is reset. Once the OML is established on a port, it is always used unless the BTS is reset or the OML is disconnected. If the
established OML is disconnected, the BTS automatically switches the OML over to another port to re-establish the OML.
Size of the OML/ESL/EML Downlink LAPD window
Code of the signaling point of the local office in the signaling network. In the signaling
network, each signaling point has a corresponding signaling point code.
None SysOpt
0~63 dB 35
0~255 bit 63
None L0
FORBID, RESTORE None None
1~200 characters None None
0~36 None 0
0~63 dB 20
NO, YES None YES
SysOpt, OSubcell, USubcell, NoPrefer
Channel assignment policies used when TCHs are assigned in an IUO cell: SysOpt:
The system selects the preferentially-assigned service layer and assigns channels
according to the measurement reports on SDCCHs; USubcell: preferentially assigns the
TCHs on the underlay; OSubcell: preferentially assigns the TCHs on the
overlay; NoPrefer: use the normal channel assignment algorithm to assign channels.
Preferentially assigns channels on the overlay when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH
is no smaller than "Assign-optimum-level Threshold" and the TA is smaller than "TA Threshold of Assignment Pref"; otherwise,
assigns channels on the underlay to ensure successful channel assignment.
Preferentially assigns channels on the overlay when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH
is no smaller than "Assign-optimum-level Threshold" and the TA is smaller than "TA Threshold of Assignment Pref"; otherwise,
assigns channels on the underlay to ensure successful channel assignment.
L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7
This parameter specifies the TRX priority in channel assignment. The smaller this
parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is. For two TRXs with other conditions identical, channels on the TRX with higher priority are
preferentially assigned.
The operation type can be "FORBID" or "RESTORE".
Ordinary frequency. Multiple frequencies are separated by "&". For example,
"22&33&44&55" are allocated to TRXs in ascending order.
This parameter indicates the total number of hardware modules, excluding those of GSM.
One of the parameters that decide the underlay and overlay areas in an enhanced
IUO cell. The underlay and overlay areas are decided by "OtoU HO Received Level Threshold", "UtoO HO Received Level
Threshold", "RX_QUAL Threshold", "TA Threshold", and "TA Hysteresis" together.
Whether to assign channel requests initiated in the underlay subcell to the overlay or
underlay subcells according to "UL Subcell General Overload Threshold". If the load of
the underlay is higher than "UL Subcell General Overload Threshold", incoming calls in the underlay subcell will be preferentially
assigned to the overlay subcell.
500~60000 ms 10000
500~60000 ms 10000
NO, YES None NO
0~100 per cent 80
0~50 W 15
0~63 dB 25
NO, YES None YES
1~255 s 1
1~255 s 5
0~63 dB 5
The timer is used to set the time when the BSC6900 waits for a handover success
message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.
The timer is used to set the time when the BSC6900 waits for an HO REQ ACK
message after a Handover Request message is reported in an outgoing BSC handover. If
the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.
Whether to use external 2G neighboring cells as the target cells of load handovers
When the load of the underlay subcell is higher than this parameter, some of the calls in the underlay subcell will be switched to the overlay subcell, and channels in the overlay subcell will be preferentially assigned to calls
initiated in the underlay subcell as well.
Power overload threshold for triggering outgoing handover from the TRX under the prerequisite that the power amplifier of the
TRX provides the maximum output power. If the power overload exceeds this threshold, the TRX triggers outgoing handover for lack
of power.
Lower threshold of the overlay level during overlay-to-underlay handovers. When the receive level of an MS is higher than this threshold, the MS can be switched to the
underlay subcell.
Whether to switch some of the calls in the underlay subcell to the overlay when the load of the underlay is higher than this parameter
If the underlay load is higher than "UL Subcell Serious Overload Threshold", the underlay-to-
overlay handover period subtracts a value that equals this threshold from "UL Subcell
Load Hierarchical HO Periods" every second.
When the load of the underlay subcell exceeds "UL Subcell General Overload
Threshold", all the calls that are using this cell as the serving cell generate handover requests at the same time, which will
suddenly increase the load of the BSC and possibly cause congestion in the overlay
subcell, thus causing the handovers to fail. To solve this problem, the BSC uses the
hierarchical load handover algorithm to gradually switch some of the calls in the
underlay subcell to the overlay subcell. This parameter indicates the duration of each
handover level.
Level step during underlay-to-overlay hierarchical load handovers
0~100 per cent 50
HIGH, LOW None HIGH
HIGH, LOW None HIGH
HIGH, LOW None HIGH
HIGH, LOW None HIGH
1.0~200.0 (step: 0.1) W None
30.0~53.0 (step: 0.1) dB None Output power of the location group
0.1dB, 0.1W None None Output power unit of the location group
0~100 per cent 90
NO, YES None NO
10~3500 mA 320
10~3500 mA 320
When the load of the underlay subcell is lower than this parameter, some of the calls in the
overlay subcell will be switched to the underlay subcell, and channels in the underlay subcell will be preferentially
assigned to channel requests initiated in the overlay subcell as well.
Level of the accessed alarm signal. If the alarm signal has high level, this parameter
should be set to 0. Otherwise, it should be set to 1.
Level of the accessed alarm signal. If the alarm signal has high level, this parameter
should be set to 0. Otherwise, it should be set to 1.
Level of the accessed alarm signal. If the alarm signal has high level, this parameter
should be set to 0. Otherwise, it should be set to 1.
Level of the accessed alarm signal. If the alarm signal has high level, this parameter
should be set to 0. Otherwise, it should be set to 1.
Output power of the location group. For a location group that consists of MRRU or
GRRU boards, the default output power is 15W. For a location group that consists of DRRU boards, the default output power
varies with frequency bands. That is, when the frequency band is 850M/900M, the default
output power is 18W; when the frequency band is 1800M/1900M, the default output
power is 15W.
When the load of the underlay subcell is higher than this parameter, the underlay-to-
overlay load handover period subtracts a period that equals "Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO" from "UL Subcell Load Hierarchical
HO Periods" every second, thus increasing the load handover speed.
This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-RAT load handover in connection mode
(after the assignment is complete).
Abnormally alarm raise threshold triggered by too heavy current of the ANT_A tributary
antenna. When the actual current is higher than the configured value, the ALD Current
Abnormally Alarm is triggered with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 0.
Abnormally alarm raise threshold triggered by too heavy current of the ANT_B tributary
antenna. When the actual current is higher than the configured value, the ALD Current
Abnormally Alarm is triggered with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 0.
10~3500 mA 185
10~3500 mA 280
10~3500 mA 280
10~3500 mA 155
1~255 s 15
40.0~70.0 (step: 0.1) degree Celsius 580
NO, YES None NO
Abnormally alarm raise threshold triggered by too heavy current of the RET tributary
antenna. When the actual current is higher than the configured value, the ALD Current
Abnormally Alarm is triggered with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 0.
Clearance threshold for the alarm triggered when the ANT_A tributary antenna is over
current. When the actual current is below this threshold, the ALD Current Abnormal Alarm is
cleared.
Abnormally alarm clearance threshold triggered by too heavy current of the ANT_B tributary antenna. When the actual current is
lower than the configured value, the ALD Current Abnormally Alarm clearance is triggered with the corresponding alarm
tributary No. of 0.
Clearance threshold for the alarm triggered when the RET tributary antenna is over
current. When the actual current is below this threshold, the ALD Current Abnormally Alarm
is cleared.
Interval for the BTS transmitting overload messages to the BSC6900. This parameter is
used to control the reporting frequency of overload messages by the channel and TRX.
The overload can be the TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, or AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
Temperature threshold of the derating function of the cabinet
This parameter specifies whether the multi-carrier transceiver unit supports the Multi-
Carrier Intelligent Voltage Regulation feature.When this parameter is set to YES, the multi-
carrier transceiver unit automatically regulates its working voltage according to the power requirements of a service. When this
parameter is set to NO, the multi-carrier transceiver unit works at a fixed working voltage.This parameter applies only to
For other base stations, this parameter is not displayed and cannot be configured (the fixed
value is Null).
NO, YES None NO
10~65535 None 180
0~255 ms 255
10~65535 None 220
1~8 None 4
None Pan_1
None Pan_2
None Pan_20
Whether to support the function of moving the packet assignment down to the BTS. To
improve the access speed of the MS, after the packet assignment is moved down to the
BTS, the BSC reserves the uplink resources for the BTS. The BTS obtains the channel
request of the MB by analyzing the downlink acknowledgement message sent by the MS. Then the BTS allocates the reserved uplink
resources to the MS to move the packet assignment to the BTS.
Average number of paging messages allowed in a cell in a period
Lifetime of a paging message in the queue of the BTS. The setting of this parameter must be consistent with the setting of timer T3113 in the core network; otherwise, the efficiency of paging scheduling over the Um interface is
reduced. It is recommended that this parameter be set to a value one to two
seconds shorter than timer T3113. The units of this parameter is 250ms.
Maximum number of paging messages allowed in a cell in a period
For the BTS, this parameter is used to determine paging retransmissions. This
parameter and the number of paging times configured in the MSC determine the number of paging retransmissions. The total number of paging times is approximately equal to the
value of this parameter multiplied by the number of paging times configured in the
MSC.
Pan_0, Pan_1, Pan_2, Pan_3, Pan_4, Pan_5,
Pan_6, Pan_7, 255
This parameter sets the PAN_DEC value used by the counter N3102 of the MS. When the timer T3182 of the MS expires, the N3102 reduces the value of PAN_DEC. 0: the value of PAN_DEC is 0; 7: the value of PAN_DEC is 7; Value N indicates that PAN_DEC is N;
Not use: this parameter is not used.
Pan_0, Pan_1, Pan_2, Pan_3, Pan_4, Pan_5,
Pan_6, Pan_7, 255
This parameter sets the PAN_INC value used by the counter N3102 of the MS. When
receiving the packet uplink acknowledged or unacknowledged message sent by the
network (V(S) or V(A) increases), the MS increases the count (PAN_INC) of the counter N3102. 0: the value of PAN_INC is 0; 7: the
value of PAN_INC is 7; Value N indicates that PAN_DEC is N; Not use: this parameter is not
used.
Pan_4, Pan_8, Pan_12, Pan_16, Pan_20, Pan_24,
Pan_28, Pan_32, 255
RAN_MAX value, the maximum value of the N3102. 4: the value of PAN_MAX is 4; 32: the value of PAN_MAX is 32. Value N indicates
that PAN_DEC is N; Not use: this parameter is not used.
None L0
0~99 None None Patch number of the TMU board software
0~25.5, step:0.01 dB 79
NO, YES None NO
dB DB2
NO, YES None YES
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
0~127 dB 68
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 6
ms 3
BCCH, PDCH None PDCH
L0, L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7
Priority level at which the BSC shuts down the power amplifier of the TRX when the
intelligent shutdown function is enabled. If this parameter is set smaller, the priority level is
higher, the power amplifier of the TRX is shut down later.
Transmission loss difference between radio frequencies on different bands
Whether to perform path loss-based sorting in a better cell handover algorithm
Whether to use the PBGT handover algorithm. PBGT handovers are based on path loss. The PBGT handover algorithm
searches in real time for cells that have lower path loss and meet certain system
requirements, and decides whether to perform the handovers. To avoid ping-pong handovers, PBGT handovers can occur only on TCHs and among cells on a same layer
and a same priority level.
The triggering of PBGT handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when the condition for PBGT handovers is met for a consecutive P
seconds during N seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to
the P in the P/N criteria.
PBGT handovers to a neighboring cell are allowed only when the downlink level
difference between the neighboring cell and the serving cell is larger than this parameter. When the value of this parameter is smaller
than 64, handovers to a neighboring cell with a lower level than the current serving cell are
allowed.
The triggering of PBGT handovers must meet the P/N criteria, that is, when the condition for PBGT handovers is met for a consecutive P
seconds during N seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to
the N in the P/N criteria.
TCH:480~7200, step:480; SDCCH:470~7050,
step:470
Minimum interval between two consecutive power control commands
Channel used for the measured receiving power. It is used to set the measured
receiving power level of the channel and control the power of the uplink.
NO, YES None NO
10~160 None 80
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
10~70 None 70
0~65534 None None ID of the peer BSC6900
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
0~2047 None None
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None IP address of the peer end of BTS PPP Link.
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
Whether the PCU supports the PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK message. If the BTS
supports the FLEXABIS function, the CS service can preempt the timeslots on the Abis
interface used by the PS service. After the preemption occurs, the BSC6900 sends a
PREEMPT_ABIS_LINK message to the PCU if the PCU can process the message.
PDCH downlink multiplex threshold, Indicating the maximum TBFs on the
downlink PDCH (parameter value/10).We recommand that the value of "Downlink
Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion" should be less than "PDCH
Downlink Multiplex Threshold" for triggering converting dynamic channel in time and
reducing PDCH multiplex.
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Power Optimization Based on Channel
Type feature. The working voltage of the TRX varies with the modulation mode of the
channel. When this parameter is set to YES, the TRX adopts the working voltage
according to the modulation mode of the dynamic PDCH.
This parameter must be used together with "Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel" in
the following conditions:1. When "Level of Preempting Dynamic
Channel" is set to "No preempt of service TCHF" and "PDCH Reforming" is set to "Yes", the channels for the CS service is released if the CS service fails to be switched to another
channel.2: When "Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel" is set to "Preempt all dynamic
TCHFs" or "No preempt of CCHs" and "PDCH Reforming" is set to "Yes", the CS service is
switched to the original channel if the CS service fails to be switched to another
channel.
PDCH uplink multiplex threshold, indicating the maximum TBFs on the uplink PDCH
(parameter value/10). We recommand that the value of "Uplink Multiplex Threshold of
Dynamic Channel Conversion" should be less than "PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold" for
triggering converting dynamic channel in time and reducing PDCH multiplex.
IP address of the peer BSC6900 on the homing BSC6900 side
Subnet mask of the port IP address at the peer BSC6900.
Identifier of the peer BTS on the homing BSC6900 side
IP address of the peer end of BTS MLPPP Group.
NO, YES None YES
0~255 s 10
0~63 None 30
0~255 s 255
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
24~1031 byte 1031
NO, YES None NO
Whether to punish the target cell when a handover fails or to punish the current serving
cell when a handover is of more TA or bad quality.
After a handover fails due to congestion of the target cell, the system needs to punish the
target cell to prevent the MS from attempting to switch to the target cell again.
Ping-pong handovers can easily occur when handovers are of more TA or bad quality. In these cases, the system needs to punish the
current serving cells.
Penalty duration for cell reselection. Cell penalty can be performed only in this
duration. When this parameter is set to a greater value, the MS cannot reselect a cell for a longer time in the case of reselection
failure or reselection due to load. The penalty timer is shorter when this parameter is set to
a smaller value.
When the cell reselection failure message is received or the load cell reselection is
initiated, the "Cell Penalty Level" is subtracted from the receive level of the target cell to avoid that cell reselection failure occurs
repeatedly or that multiple MSs are reselected to the same target cell. This parameter is valid only within "Cell Penalty Duration".
Timer of penalty on a neighboring cell when a handover fails due to faults of data
configuration.
Whether to compress the protocol field of the PPP link.
Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether
"Cell Reselect Offset", "Cell Reselect Temporary Offset" in the "SET
GCELLIDLEAD" command, and "Cell Reselect Penalty Time" are used.
Maximum multiplexing frame length. The length of the multiplexed packet must not exceed the maximum multiplexing frame
length. If the length of the multiplexed packet exceeds the maximum multiplexing frame
length, the packet is transferred without being added with new subframes. The frame length refers to the payload, excluding the IP/UDP
header.
Whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS flow. In the PACKET SI STATUS
flow, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status message to indicate that the MS has stored
the system message. The network side sends the Packet Serving Cell Data message to notify the MS of the system message not
9_level, 10_level, 11_level, 12_level, 13_level, 14_level, 16_level, no use
Persistence level 4 of the radio access priority.
During MS access, the access priority of the MS is set. If the priority of the MS is higher than the access priority of the MS, the cell
allows the access of the MS. Otherwise, the cell rejects the access of the MS. The value "no use" indicates this parameter is not used.
Power attenuation level of the EDGE TRX. There are 50 power attenuation levels. At
each level, the power is attenuated by 0.2 dB. The spectrum requirements are met only
when the power of an EDGE transceiver for transmitting 8PSK signals is lower than the
average power for GMSK modulation.
Interval for sending cell paging group packets when Paging Messages Optimize at Abis
Interface is enabled
Number of cell paging group packets when Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface
is enabled
Whether to enable Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface. The BSC6900
combines multiple paging messages to a cell paging package and then sends the package
to the BTS. The package reduces header overhead and thus reducing the load on the
Abis link.
Maximum transmission delay of the POC service (push to talk over cellular). The
transmission delay of the POC service must be relatively small. The network side must support the function of detecting the POC service type and reduce the delay through
related processing to meet the POC service requirement. For the POC service received by the network side, Transfer Delay in the ABQP must be lower than the transmission threshold
of the POC service.
Maximum bandwidth of the POC service (push to talk over cellular). The transmission delay of the POC service must be relatively small. The network side must support the function of detecting the POC service type
and reduce the delay through related processing to meet the POC service
requirement. For the POC service received by the network side, GbrValue in the ABQP must be lower than the maximum bandwidth of the
POC service.
6~120 None 6
NotSupport, Support None Support
0~9 None 2
0~9 None 2
0~1 None None
0~1 None None
None None
BCCHNorm, BCCHExt None BCCHNorm
0.1~100.0 (step: 0.1) kVA 125
0~1000 None 100 Battery current shunt coefficient
Minimum bandwidth of the POC service (push to talk over cellular). The transmission delay of the POC service must be relatively small.
The network side must support the function of detecting the POC service type and reduce
the delay through related processing to meet the POC service requirement. For the POC
service received by the network side, GbrValue in the ABQP must be larger than
the minimum bandwidth of the POC service.
Whether to support the push to talk over cellular (POC) service
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output
power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated. This
parameter and "Power output error threshold" indicate the two thresholds of the error. If this parameter is set to a large value, the error is
small. The value range is 0 to 9, indicating -10 dB to -1 dB.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output
power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated. This parameter and "Power output reduction
threshold" indicate the two thresholds of the error. If this parameter is set to a large value, the error is small. The value range is 0 to 9,
indicating -10 dB to -1 dB.
Number of the port where to set up the link after the BTS ring is swapped. If this
parameter is set to 0, the BTS works on a forward ring. If this parameter is set to 1, the
BTS works on a backward ring.
Number of the port where to set up the link after the main and backup OMLs of the BTS
are swapped
TOPEXTOUTPORT, TOPEXTINPORT
Type of the port. If this parameter is set to "TOPEXTOUTPORT", the local E1/T1 ports are used to extend the transmission of other boards. That is, the timeslots on the source
E1/T1 port are used by other boards through the extended E1/T1 port. If this parameter is set to "TOPEXTINPORT", the local E1/T1
ports are used to extend the transmission of local boards. That is, the local boards can
obtain the timeslots from other boards through the extended E1/T1 port.
Whether to transmit the 2Quater message on the BCCH Norm channel or the BCCH Ext
channel
Rated maximum output power of the diesel engine. Refer to the rated output power
described on the diesel engine label.
0~10, step: 0.2 dB 0
0~10, step: 0.2 dB 0
None DEFAULT
OFF, ON None OFF
0~255 None 60
Power attenuation level of timeslot 7 of the BCCH in 16QAM. The attenuation level
ranges from 0 to 50, with the step of 0.2 dB. When the EDGE TRX sends signals in
16QAM, the transmit power must be lower than the mean power in GMSK.
Power attenuation level of timeslot 7 of the BCCH in 32QAM. The attenuation level
ranges from 0 to 50, with the step of 0.2 dB. When the EDGE TRX sends signals in
32QAM, the transmit power must be lower than the mean power in GMSK.
This parameter controls the handovers among cells on a same layer. A smaller
priority value indicates a higher priority. Cells with higher priorities are preferentially selected as the handover target cells.
If the static Abis resource load is greater than the value of "Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred" and the dynamic Abis resource load is greater than the value of this parameter, the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the
full-rate channel is preferred.
Priority of the hierarchical cell structure (HCS).
0: indicates the lowest priority; 7: indicates the highest priority.
TDME1_O, TDME1_1, FE_E, FE_O, IPOE
Preferential customized detection type when the customized sequence is used for port
detection.
Number of customized detection types involved when the customized sequence is
used for port detection.
None None
None None
5~300 s 15
0~255 min 5
0~7 None 4
1~16 None 6
NO, YES None NO
0~7 None 6
0~63 None 25
TDME1_O, TDME1_1, FE_E, FE_O, IPOE
Subsidiary customized detection type when the customized sequence is used for port
detection. This parameter is valid only when Number of Customized Detection Types is set
to 2.
DEFAULT, CUSTOMIZDE, DISABLE
Port detection sequence used during BTS startup.
The transmission resource in the Abis timeslot is considered as faulty only when the BTS detects that the Abis timeslot is faulty in the delay. The transmission resource in the Abis timeslot is considered as normal when the BTS detects the Abis timeslot is normal.
This parameter specifies a period of time during which a cell cannot be enabled or
disabled to prevent frequent cell enabling or disabling operations. That is, after a cell is enabled, it cannot be disabled within the
period of time specified by this parameter; after a cell is disabled, it cannot be enabled
within the period of time specified by this parameter.
Priority for PS services over the Abis interface in IP, IP over E1, or HDLC mode when PS
preferred. When "Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel" is set to "No preempt of
service TCHF" through the "SET GCELLPSCHM" command, PS services are assigned with a high priority. If "PS High PRI
Service PRI" is set to a great value, the priority for PS services becomes low.
Period for sending the packet message PSI. If the period is too long, the message PSI
cannot be obtained in realtime. If the period is too short, the message PSI is broadcast
frequently, which occupies too much system resources.
Whether the BSC supports the state message PSI. The state message PSI refers to PSI
STATUS.
Priority for PS services over the Abis interface in IP, IP over E1, or HDLC mode when CS
preferred. When "Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel" is set to "Preempt all
dynamic TCHFs" or "No preempt of CCHs" through the "SET GCELLPSCHM" command, CS services are assigned with a high priority. If "PS Low PRI Service PRI" is set to a great value, the priority for PS services becomes
low.
Threshold of the receive level for triggering the handover of the PS services from the overlaid subcell to the underlaid subcell
-121~-104 dBm -109
-121~-104 dBm -109
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None YES
This parameter specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. If the
receive level of the RACH burst in the PS domain is smaller than the value of PS RACH
Min.Access Level, the BTS regards this access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater than the value of PS RACH
Min. Access Level, the BTS considers that an access request exists on this timeslot, and
determines together with the value of "Random Access Error Threshold" whether
the RACH access is valid.
Minimum voltage level for accessing PS services of the location group
Whether to enable the DPSU0 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the DPSU1 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the DPSU2 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the DPSU2 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the DPSU3 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the DPSU4 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the DPSU5 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the DPSU6 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
NO, YES None YES
0~63 None 35
NO, YES None None
0~31 s 0
BOOL, VALUE None BOOL Alarm port type
0~15 None None
None None
1~50 characters None None
Whether to enable the DPSU7 to supply power for the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Threshold of the receive level for triggering the handover of the PS services from the underlaid subcell to the overlaid subcell
This parameter specifies whether the BTS is allowed to enable the PSU Smart Control
feature.When this parameter is set to YES, the BTS automatically enables or disables the PSU
according to the traffic volume to improve the efficiency of the PSU. When this parameter is
set to NO, the PSUs of the BTS are all working.
The following types of BTS support the PSU Smart Control feature:
BTS3012AEBTS3900A, BTS3900, DBS3900, and
BTS3900L: support the PSU Smart Control feature through the matching APM30.
Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell
reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec.
05.08 and 04.08.
Number of a BTS HDLC path. It is unique in one [BTS].
APM100, APM200, APM30, EPS4890,
EPS4815, SC48200, CUSTOM
Power system type. When the PMU is installed on the rack, you can select the
custom power system type.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
This parameter specifies the patch version loaded to the BTS.
This parameter can be set to only a hot patch version. You can use either of the following methods to query the version number of the
BTS hot patch.Method 1: If the BTS hot patch is downloaded to the OMU through the MML command DLD BTSPATCH, you can run the MML command LST BTSPATCH to obtain the number of the hot patch package and the hot patch version
according to the returned result.Method 2: If the BTS hot patch is not
downloaded to the OMU, you can decompress the BTS hot patch package.
Then, check the patchcfg.xml file in the level-1 directory of the compressed package. The
value after the label "PatchVersion" is the software version.
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
PWR2, PWR3 None PWR3
0~3 None 1
NO, YES None YES
None ALLPwrLoc
None None Power mode.
0~720 min 5
NO, YES None YES
Whether to allow active power control. If this parameter is set to YES, the system performs power forecast in the process of initial access
assignment or service channel activation during intra-BSC handovers, and sends the
forecast initial power information to the BTSs through channel activation messages. In this
way, the MSs and BTSs can adjust the transmit power. If this parameter is set to NO, the system does not perform power forecast, and the MSs and BTSs choose the maximum
transmit power.
Whether to enable the optimized power control algorithm III
Whether to enable power control algorithm II or power control algorithm III
If a class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after random access, the power that the MS uses
is the MS maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power
deviation. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This
parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the
DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.
OnlyCurPwrLoc, ALLPwrLoc
Whether to enable the power amplifier for all location groups. 0x01 indicates that the TRX
power amplifier is enabled for all location groups. 0x00 indicates that the TRX power amplifier is enabled for the current location
group.
CLASS0, CLASS1, CLASS2
Time interval between the time when the BTS detects that the external power supply is shut down and the time when the backup power decrease function is started. This parameter is valid in the BTSs that supports the backup
power decrease function.
When this parameter is set to YES, The BSC6900 preferentially uses the TRX with
good power-saving performance according to the TRX power priority reported by the BTS. Smaller priority value indicates better power
saving quality. If the priority is of a great value, the BTS closes TRXs late.
None Default
OFF, ON None OFF
OFF, ON None OFF
OFF, ON None OFF
Use_Qsearch_I, Always None Use_Qsearch_I
NO, YES None NO
1~10 None 3
0~255 s 15
1~10 None 2
DB0, DB2, DB4, DB6, DB8, DB10, DB12, DB14,
DB16, DB18, Default
Finetune of the TRX power. During the static finetune of the TRX power, the BSC adjusts the TRX power at a step of 0.2 dB. In some scenarios, the losses vary depending on the tributaries where the power is combined, and
the power difference before and after the power output is not an integral multiple of 2
dB. As a result, the cabinet-top output power cannot be adjusted at a step of 2 dB, and the TRX output power cannot be consistent with the cabinet-top output power. Therefore, this parameter provides a smaller step that can
adjust the cabinet-top output power.
When the ANT_A tributary antenna power switch is ON, it is allowed to configure related
parameters of the ANT_A tributary.
When the ANT_B tributary antenna power switch is ON, it is allowed to configure related
parameters of the ANT_B tributary.
When the RET tributary antenna power switch is ON, it is allowed to configure related
parameters of the RET tributary.
This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in connection
mode before ""Qsearch C"" is obtained.
Whether to enable the fast moving micro-cell handover algorithm. The fast moving micro-cell handover algorithm enables fast moving
MSs to switch over to macro-cells, thus reducing the handover times.
This parameter is used in the P/N criteria decision: If an MS quickly passes through N out of P micro-cells lately, the BSC enables
the fast moving micro-cell handover algorithm. This parameter corresponds to the
N in the P/N criteria.
A time threshold determined based on the radius of a cell and the moving speed of an
MS. If the MS crosses the cell in a time period shorter than this threshold, the BSC
concludes that the MS quickly passes through the cell. Otherwise, it concludes that the MS
slowly passes the cell.
This parameter is used in the P/N criteria decision: If an MS quickly passes through N out of P micro-cells lately, the BSC enables
the fast moving micro-cell handover algorithm. This parameter corresponds to the
the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells; if
this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is above 10, then the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
The values of this parameter correspond to the following decibel values:
0: -98 dBm1: -94 dBm 2: -90 dBm
3: -86 dBm 4: -82 dBm
5: -78 dBm 6: -74 dBm 7: (always),
that is, the MS keeps searching for 3G cells
8: -78 dBm9: -74 dBm 10: -70 dBm 11: -66 dBm
TCH:480~15360, step:480;
SDCCH:470~15040, step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of measurement reports used for the filtering of the signal quality on service or data channels. This parameter is used to determine whether
interferences exist on channels.
TCH:480~15360, step:480;
SDCCH:470~15040, step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of measurement reports used for the filtering of the signal quality on signaling channels. This
parameter is used to determine whether interferences exist on channels.
Whether to support QoC optimization. The GSN equipment for the GPRS provides flexible QoS mechanisms for different
subscribers. The QoS level is also set during subscription. The QoS control parameters
include: service priority, reliability level, delay level, and data throughput level. During QoS negotiation, the MS can apply for one value for each QoS attribute. When receiving the
request from the MS, the network must allocate a QoS level to each attribute for each QoS document. The network provides related resources for the negotiated QoS document.
above [8, 15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells. For example, if this parameter is set to 5
and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells; if this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is above 10,
then the MS starts to search for 3G cells.
The values of this parameter correspond to the following decibel values: 0: -98 dBm 1: -94 dBm ... 6: -74 dBm 7: (always) 8: -
In connection mode, if the signal level is below [0-7] or above [8-15], the MS starts to
search for 3G cells. For example, if this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells; if this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is above 10, then the MS starts to search for 3G cells. 0: -98 dBm
1: -94 dBm
...6: -74 dBm7: (always)8: -78 dBm9: -74 dBm
...14: -54 dBm
15: Positive infinity (never)
This parameter is used to avoid allocating the calls whose signal strengths differ greatly to
the same timeslot. The BSC measures the signal merge conditions on each timeslot every 0.5
seconds. If the difference between the highest signal strength and the lowest signal strength on a timeslot is greater than the value of "UL
Signal Strength Difference Threshold", it regards it as a signal merge event.
If N signal merge events are consecutively detected among P times of measurements,
the forcible intra-cell handover is triggered to switch the call with the highest signal strength
to another timeslot in the cell.Here, N indicates "UL Signal Strength
Difference Detections", P indicates "UL Signal Strength Difference Maintains".
1~16 s 3
1~16 s 5
NONE, DYNAMIC None NONE
3~20 None 6
3~20 None 6
0~4 dB 2
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO Whether to allow the fast handover algorithm
None
NO, YES None NO Whether to configure a battery rack for rack 0
The P/N criteria is used to determine low downlink power for multi-density carriers. If the downlink power of a multi-density carrier remains low during a consecutive P seconds out of N seconds, the downlink power of the multi-density carrier is considered low. This parameter corresponds to the P in the P/N
criteria.
The P/N criteria is used to determine low downlink power for multi-density carriers. If the downlink power of a multi-density carrier remains low during a consecutive P seconds out of N seconds, the downlink power of the multi-density carrier is considered low. This parameter corresponds to the N in the P/N
criteria.
Whether to use the statistical multiplexing algorithm for multi-density power
Maximum number of times that the BTS finds that the air conditioner needs to be switched off. If the number of times that the BTS finds that the air conditioner needs to be switched off in the "CHKOFFTIMES" checks reaches this parameter, the BTS switches off the air
conditioner.
Maximum number of times that the BTS finds that the air conditioner needs to be switched on. If the number of times that the BTS finds that the air conditioner needs to be switched on in the "CHKONTIMES" checks reaches this parameter, the BTS switches on the air
conditioner.
Step of downward power adjustment according to the quality of the received
signals
Whether to query the classmark of the call in an incoming BSC handover
AU0, AU1, AU2, AU3, AU4, AU5, AU6, AU7
AU0-0&AU1-0&AU2-0&AU3-0&AU4-0&AU5-
0&AU6-0&AU7-0
Auxiliary devices of rack 0. This parameter contains eight bits.
The eight bits, from the most significant bit to the least significant bit, indicate whether to install a voltage stabilizer, internal battery, transmission power supply, temperature control unit, auxiliary device 5, auxiliary
device 6, auxiliary device 7, and auxiliary device 8. When a bit is set to 1, the relevant auxiliary device is installed. When a bit is set
to 0, the relevant auxiliary device is not installed. For example, if this parameter is set
to 10000000, rack 0 is configured with an auxiliary voltage stabilizer.
None INSIDE_50AH
007C, 010C, 015C None 015C
None INSIDE_BATTERY Type of the battery rack configured for rack 0
None
NO, YES None NO Whether to configure a battery rack for rack 1
Capacity of the battery rack configured for rack 0
Ratio of the maximum charging current of the battery pack configured for rack 0 to the
capacity of the battery pack. For example, assume that the battery pack has a capacity of 200 AH. If this parameter is set to 0.15C, the maximum charging current of the battery
pack is 30 A (= 0.15 x 200).
INSIDE_BATTERY, OUTSIDE_BATTERY
AU0, AU1, AU2, AU3, AU4, AU5, AU6, AU7
AU0-0&AU1-0&AU2-0&AU3-0&AU4-0&AU5-
0&AU6-0&AU7-0
Auxiliary devices of rack 1. This parameter contains eight bits.
The eight bits, from the most significant bit to the least significant bit, indicate whether to install a voltage stabilizer, internal battery, transmission power supply, temperature control unit, auxiliary device 5, auxiliary
device 6, auxiliary device 7, and auxiliary device 8. When a bit is set to 1, the relevant auxiliary device is installed. When a bit is set
to 0, the relevant auxiliary device is not installed. For example, if this parameter is set
to 10000000, rack 1 is configured with an auxiliary voltage stabilizer.
None INSIDE_50AH
007C, 010C, 015C None 015C
None INSIDE_BATTERY Type of the battery rack configured for rack 1
None
NO, YES None NO Whether to configure a battery rack for rack 2
Capacity of the battery rack configured for rack 1
Ratio of the maximum charging current of the battery pack configured for rack 1 to the
capacity of the battery pack. For example, assume that the battery pack has a capacity of 200 AH. If this parameter is set to 0.15C, the maximum charging current of the battery
pack is 30 A (= 0.15 x 200).
INSIDE_BATTERY, OUTSIDE_BATTERY
AU0, AU1, AU2, AU3, AU4, AU5, AU6, AU7
AU0-0&AU1-0&AU2-0&AU3-0&AU4-0&AU5-
0&AU6-0&AU7-0
Auxiliary devices of rack 2. This parameter contains eight bits.
The eight bits, from the most significant bit to the least significant bit, indicate whether to install a voltage stabilizer, internal battery, transmission power supply, temperature control unit, auxiliary device 5, auxiliary
device 6, auxiliary device 7, and auxiliary device 8. When a bit is set to 1, the relevant auxiliary device is installed. When a bit is set
to 0, the relevant auxiliary device is not installed. For example, if this parameter is set
to 10000000, rack 2 is configured with an auxiliary voltage stabilizer.
None INSIDE_50AH
007C, 010C, 015C None 015C
None INSIDE_BATTERY Type of the battery rack configured for rack 2
0~255 None 0
0~255 None 0
0~255 None 0 Identifies the routing area of the current cell
0~255 None None Route area of the current cell0~255 None None Route area of the current cell0~255 None None Route area of the current cell
Capacity of the battery rack configured for rack 2
Ratio of the maximum charging current of the battery pack configured for rack 2 to the
capacity of the battery pack. For example, assume that the battery pack has a capacity of 200 AH. If this parameter is set to 0.15C, the maximum charging current of the battery
pack is 30 A (= 0.15 x 200).
INSIDE_BATTERY, OUTSIDE_BATTERY
The NS performs location management based on routing areas during GPRS packet
services. Each routing area has a routing area identifier, which is broadcast as a
system message.
The NS performs location management based on routing areas during GPRS packet
services. Each routing area has a routing area identifier.
This parameter specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. If the
receive level of the RACH burst in the CS domain is smaller than the value of CS RACH
Min.Access Level, the BTS regards this access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater than the value of CS RACH
Min. Access Level, the BTS considers that an access request exists on this timeslot, and
determines together with the value of "Random Access Error Threshold" whether
the RACH access is valid.
0~63 dB 16
0~65535 None 5000
-121~-104 dBm -109
0~7 None 1 Routing area color code of the GPRS cell
NO, YES None YES
0~255 None 225
dB 2dB
10M, 100M, AUTO None 100M Port rate of the IP interface board
ALG1, ALG2, NONE None ALG1
DISABLE, ENABLE None DISABLE
Level threshold of the MS random access for the BTS to determine the RACH busy state.
When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy.
Number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement.
The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC6900
determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.
Minimum voltage level for accessing CS services of the location group
Whether to allow the MS to access another cell
Correlation threshold of the training sequence for the random access.
As defined in the GSM recommendation, the system can determine whether the received signals are random access signals of the MS and calculate the TA value by checking the correlation of the 41-bit training sequence.
Random Access Error Threshold Number of Correct Bits in the 41-Bit Training
Hysteresis of cell selection in different routing area. When a standby or ready MS starts cell reselection, if the original cell and the target
cell are in the different routing area, the signal level of the neighboring cell must be greater that of the current cell. Their difference must
be larger than the specified hysteresis. Otherwise the MS cannot start cell
reselection. The larger the hysteresis of GPRS cell selection, the harder to start cell
reselection.
Switch for controlling the AMR rate. Value 0 indicates that C/I is used to control the AMR rate. Value 1 indicates that BER is used to
control the AMR rate.
This parameter specifies whether the RATSCCH function is enabled during the call establishment procedure. RATSCCH is used
to dynamically reconfigure the rate set of AMR while on a call. This parameter maps
the versions of base stations.
None NONE
NO, YES None YES Whether to allow the reassignment function
Same_Band, Diff_Band None Diff_Band
0~70 None 50
0~70 None 40
0~63 dB 5
0~63 dB 30
NO, YES None YES
0~70 None 60
NO, YES None NO
0~95 None None
00:00:00~23:59:59 None None Absolute time of re-homing1~3600 s 600 Delay time of re-homing
INDEPENDENT, DIVIDING,
FOURDIVERSITY, MAINDIVERSITY, NONE
RF receive mode of the TRX.The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II,
BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity.
The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main
Diversity.
Whether to re-assign the radio channels on a different band or on the same band. This can help minimize the decrease in service quality due to interference, faulty TRX paths, or faulty
project constructions.
IUO cell receive quality threshold (AMRFR), which is used for IUO handover decision
IUO cell receive quality threshold (AMRHR), which is used for IUO handover decision
One of the parameters that decide the underlay and overlay areas. The underlay and overlay areas are determined by "RX_QUAL Threshold", "RX_LEV Threshold", "RX_LEV
Hysteresis", "TA Threshold", and "TA Hysteresis" together.
One of the parameters that decide the underlay and overlay areas. The underlay and overlay areas are determined by "RX_QUAL Threshold", "RX_LEV Threshold", "RX_LEV
Hysteresis", "TA Threshold", and "TA Hysteresis" together.
Whether to use the downlink receive level as a condition in IUO handover decision
One of the parameters that decide the underlay and overlay areas.
If "Enhanced Concentric Allowed" is set to OFF, the underlay and overlay areas are determined by "RX_QUAL Threshold",
"RX_LEV Threshold", "RX_LEV Hysteresis", "TA Threshold", and "TA Hysteresis" together;
if "Enhanced Concentric Allowed" is set to ON, the underlay and overlay areas are
determined by "RX_QUAL Threshold", "UtoO HO Received Level Threshold", "OtoU HO
Received Level Threshold", "TA Threshold", and "TA Hysteresis" together.
Whether to use the downlink receive quality as a condition in IUO handover decision
Region information of the IP BTS configured with local switching. Local switching can be performed between only the BTSs that have
the same region information.
None REHOSTDELAY Policy type of re-homing
NO, YES None NO
None OFF
A, B, NONE None NONE
0~65535 None None
NO, YES None NO
0~7 None 5
NO, YES None NO
0~63 None 6
1~10 s 2 NC2 cell reselection interval in the same cell
1~32 None 10
REHOSTRIGHTNOW, REHOSTDELAY, REHOSTWHEN
Whether to enable the configuration of the "Extend Connection" attribute. The "Extend
Connection" attribute describes the cascading relationship of the DFCB, which helps the
DFCU perform the six-in-one function.
OFF, POWERSHARING, RF_FH
Function to be performed by two associated modules
Tributary Number of the DFCB that is cascaded to the DFCU. The "Extend
Connection" attribute describes the cascading relationship of the DFCB, which helps the
DFCU perform the six-in-one function.
A key parameter that indicates how many times the BSC6900 broadcasts cell
messages. You can obtain the cell broadcast times by running the "DSP GSMSCB"
command.The value 0 indicates no repeat.
When the cell supports Repeated Downlink FACCH, the BTS enables the repeated transmission of FACCH frames if the
measured downlink quality is higher than "Repeated Downlink FACCH Threshold".
If the cell supports the Repeated Downlink FACCH function and the measured downlink
quality is lower than the downlink quality threshold, the BTS enables the repeated
transmission of FACCH frames.
When the cell supports Repeated Downlink SACCH, the BTS enables the repeated transmission of SACCH frames if the
measured downlink quality is higher than the downlink quality threshold.
Indicating that during cell reselection, the level of the target cell should meet the
following condition: Level of target cell > [MAX (level of serving cell, "Cell Reselection
Level Threshold") + "Cell Reselection Hysteresis"]. In this way, ping-pong
handovers do not occur.
The number of received Packet Measurement Report messages on the receive level of the serving cell is measured continuously. When the statistical value is greater than or equal to
the value of this parameter, the normal reselection decision is made.
1~32 None 1
0~8 None 0
0~16 None 2
1~15 min None
0~190 None 0
0~21 None 5
0~255 s 10
If the number of times when the receive level of the serving cell within "Normal Cell
Reselection Watch Period" is lower than "Cell Reselection Level Threshold" is greater than the value of this parameter, the normal cell
reselection is triggered.
This parameter specifies the number of the reserved PDCHs that are not used for channel converstion in the dynamic
transferable channel pool.
This parameter specifies the number of idle channels that should be reserved on a cell
after the TRX is shut down. When the number of idle channels on a cell is smaller than this threshold, the BSC6900 enables a TRX. This
parameter is used to prevent the impact enabling or disabling delay on the efficiency
of channel assignment on the cell that is enabled with the TRX Intelligent Shutdown
feature.
The waiting time from BTS detect OML disconnect to BTS reset.
While assigning channels, the BSC ensures that the sum of the number of channels occupied by high-priority users and the
number of idle channels reserved for high-priority users is no smaller than this
parameter. Every time the BSC assigns channels to a user whose priority is lower
than "Highest Priority", it checks whether the sum of the number of channels occupied by users of "Highest Priority" and the number of idle channels is larger than the number of the reserved channels. If yes, the BSC normally assigns channels for the user; if not, the BSC
does not assign a TCHF.
Maximum number of levels that the BTS RF power decreases. This parameter is used to control the decrease in the BTS RF power. If
the value is too large, the BTS power decreases too much. If the value is too small, the BTS power decreases less and the power
decrease effect is not good.
Interval for sending the radio resource indication messages. The TRX reports the interference level for each of the channels
that have been idle for the whole measurement period.
This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC6900 of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. For details, see GSM
Rec. 08.58 and 08.08.
NO, YES None NO
RGPS, GPS None GPS
1920~30720, step: 480 ms 52_Times
0~4095 None None
None DISABLE
1. This parameter specifies whether to configure the DRFU, MRFU, GRFU, or XRFU
by slot or link.2. When setting the BTS to support the configuration of the RFU by slot, set this
parameter to "YES". When setting the BTS not to support the configuration of the RFU by
slot, set this parameter to "NO".3. If this parameter is set to "YES", you must
enter the numbers of the subrack and slot where the new board is located.
If you need to specify the CPRI connection relations (SFP port number and cascading
level) based on a rule that is different from the cabinet mapping rule specified by the system, the parameters "RXU Chain Head Port No." and "Insert RXU Position" must be specified.4. If this parameter is set to "NO", you must set "TRX Board No.", "RFU Link No." and
"RXU Chain Head Port No.".
Satellite card protocol that is enabled to communicate with the satellite card
connecting to the DGPS. If "RGPS" is specified, it indicates that the RGPS satellite card protocol is enabled to communicate with the satellite card connecting to the DGPS. If "GPS" is specified, it indicates that the GPS
satellite card protocol is enabled to communicate with the satellite card
connecting to the DGPS.
Time for disconnecting a call when the MS fails to decode the SACCH. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this
parameter value.Each time an SACCH message is not
decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly
decoded, the counter S increases by 2. When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed. Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an
unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel
handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.
RNC ID of a 3G external cell. The value of this parameter must be consistent with the
data configuration at the RNC.
DISABLE, ENABLE, UNSUPPORT
Whether to allow the BTS to report the downlink voice quality index (VQI). The VQI is used to indicate voice quality. It is calculated
on the basis of BER, FER, and frame stealing.
s 15.36sec
s 0.96sec
NO, YES, NONE None NO
ms 2
ms 6
0~255 s 5
0~63 dB 3
0~63 dB 30
0.48sec, 0.96sec, 1.92sec, 3.84sec, 7.68sec,
15.36sec, 30.72sec, 61.44sec
Cell reselection measurement report period in packet idle mode
0.48sec, 0.96sec, 1.92sec, 3.84sec, 7.68sec,
15.36sec, 30.72sec, 61.44sec
Cell reselection measurement report period in packet transmission mode
Whether to allow the BTS to report the voice quality index (VQI). If this parameter is set to
Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC6900 collects the traffic statistics on a per
VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is lower, the speech quality is better. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the
speech quality is monitored.
TCH:0~14880, step:480; SDCCH:0~14570,
step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of enhanced measurement reports received on signaling
channels used to filter the REP_QUANT value.
TCH:0~14880, step:480; SDCCH:0~14570,
step:470
For the purpose of accurately reflecting the radio environment of a network, filtering is
performed on the measured values in several consecutive measurement reports. This
parameter indicates the number of enhanced measurement reports received on voice channels used to filter the REP_QUANT
value.
Timer for punishing the neighboring cells when handover failures occur due to
resource-related causes, such as resources being insufficient
This parameter adjusts "Min RSCP threshold" to enable the selection of 3G candidate cells
based on cell priorities
This parameter determines the layers of 3G neighboring cells. If the measured value of a
3G neighboring cell is lower than this threshold, the 3G neighboring cell is
Used for calculating C2. The MS with a large value can be assigned with high access
priority.
Maximum number of TCH channels reserved for emergency call users
Whether to measure the delay on the link between the BTSs that serve the calling MS
and the called MS respectively
Maximum number of RTTI TBFs that can be multiplexed on the PDCH. A PDCH can be
assigned when the number of RTTI TBFs on it is smaller than the value of this parameter. This parameter is valid only when its value is smaller than or equal to "MSRD PDCH DL
Multiplexing Threshold".
Type of the route. When the BTS does not support IP over E1, the parameter Route Type needs to be set to NEXTHOP(Next
Hop). When the BTS supports IP over E1, the parameter Route Type needs to be set to
OUTIF(Out Interface) because the packets at the data link layer are encapsulated according to Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and the peer IP address is unknown. The benefit of setting Route Type to OUTIF(Out Interface) is that
the configuration of the route needs not to be changed after the peer IP address is
changed.
Minimum receiving power level for the MS in the cell to access the system
0~70 None 5
0~63 dB 8
NO, YES None NO
0~70 None 60
0~70 None 42
0~70 None 41
0~70 None 40
0~70 None 50
0~70 None 49
0~70 None 48
0~70 None 47
0~70 None 46
0~70 None 45
0~70 None 44
0~70 None 43
None None Index type of the RXU
None None Type of the RXU board index
1~64 characters None None Name of the RXU
1~64 characters None None
For AMR FR voice services, a fixed amount of offset is added to the corresponding grade
of the received signal quality for the interference handover of non-AMR FR voice
services.
Minimum received signal level of the MS. This level is reported in the system information.
This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For
details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63
(corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).
Whether to use the emergency handover algorithm in case the receive level of the MSs
drops rapidly, thus preventing call drops.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
Threshold for the interference handover of Non-AMR FR voice services. AMRFR refers
to Adaptive Multi-Rate Full Rate.
RXUNAME, RXUPOS, SRNSN
RXUNAME, RXUPOS, SRNSN
Name of the RXU board. The RXU name is unique in one BTS.
1~64 characters None None Name of an RXU
1~6 None None
1~6 None None
1~6 None None Position of the RXU board on an RXU chain
None None Type of the RXU board
NO, YES None NO
0~2 None 1
0~4 None 3
0~2047 None None
BYNAME, BYID None BYNAME
1~16 None 5
0~100 per cent 50
1~64 characters None None Name of the same coverage cell
Position number of the RXU on the RXU chain
Position No. of the RXU board on the RXU chain
DRRU, DRFU, MRRU, MRFU, GRRU, GRFU,
BTS3900E
Whether an MS supports the SAIC function. Single Antenna Interference Cancellation
(SAIC) is used to reduce the impact of interference on the reception of downlink
signals through a signal processing technology. An MS enabled with SAIC has improved ability of anti-interference. After
SAIC is enabled, the thresholds for BTS/MS Power Control are adjusted to improve the
radio performance of the BSS.
Adjustment step of the downlink signal quality threshold in power control algorithm II for MSs
that support SAIC. The network side uses a lower downlink signal quality threshold for
SAIC-supported MSs in power control, thus lowering the transmit power of the
corresponding BTS and reducing the interferences in the whole network.
Adjustment step of the downlink signal quality threshold in power control algorithm III for MSs that support SAIC. The network side
uses a lower downlink signal quality threshold for SAIC-supported MSs in power control,
thus lowering the transmit power of the corresponding BTS and reducing the interferences in the whole network.
Index of a cell with the same coverage as the current cell
Index type used when the command is executed
The BSC6900 checks the load of the same coverage cell of the target cell once a minute. When the number of times in which the load
of the same coverage cell is lower than "Same Coverage Cell Load Threshold" is
equal to the value of this parameter, the target cell is disabled.
A cell that can be disabled is allowed to be disabled only when the load of the same
coverage cell is lower than this threshold for a period.
0~30240, step: 480 ms 32
NO, YES None None
None ADD0dB
ms 4
This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC6900 of radio link connection failure.
When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS, the counter for determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. Each time
the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the
counter decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH
measurement report, the counter increases by 2.
When the value of this parameter is 0, the BTS regards the radio link as faulty. The BTS
sends a connection failure indication message to the BSC6900. The number of
SACCH multi-frames and the radio link failure counter in the system message specify the
radio link failure time on the uplink and that on the downlink respectively. The judgment
standard is whether the measurement report in SACCH is correctly decoded.
Whether to enable the energy saving function of the TRX for the BTS3002E.
ADD0dB, ADD10dB, Automatic
This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this
parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm to
-37 dBm.If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 0
dBm, level values 0-63 map with -110 dBm to -47 dBm.
If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is Automatic, the MS chooses the least SCALE
while ensuring that the MS can report the most strong level.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, in consideration of the accuracy of a
single measurement report, the measurement values in certain measurement reports are
filtered to represent the radio operating environment. The parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering measurement information of the
A key parameter that indicates the coding scheme of a simple cell broadcast message
Scrambling code of a 3G cell. The scrambling code is used to differentiate terminals or cells. It is used after spread
spectrum. Therefore, it does not change the bandwidth of signals, but only distinguishes the signals from different sources. Through
scrambling, multiple transceivers can use the same codes for spread spectrum. Scrambling is used to distinguish terminals on the uplink
and to distinguish cells on the downlink.
Number of SDCCH channels. Rules for SDCCH channel allocation: 1. Allocate channels 1 and 3 of main frequency B
preferentially. 2. Allocate channels 1, 3, 5, and 7 according to the physical position order
of the frequencies. Thus, the maximum number of SDCCH channels is (actual
number of frequencies - 1) *4+2.
Whether a call must camp on the SDCCH for a specific duration before being assigned with
a traffic channel.
Duration for a call camping on the SDCCH before being assigned with a traffic channel.
0~63 dB 6
0~70 None 55
0~63 dB 6
0~70 None 55
NO, YES None YES
Level threshold for measuring the number of call drops on SDCCH. When call drop occurs
on the SDCCH, the BSC6900 determines whether the downlink receive level is lower than this threshold. If the downlink receive
level is lower than this threshold and the TA is smaller than the TA threshold of the serving
cell, the number of call drops on SDCCH (receive level) is incremented by one.
Quality threshold for measuring the number of call drops on SDCCH. When call drop occurs
on the SDCCH, the BSC6900 determines whether the downlink quality level multiplied by 10 is higher than this threshold. If all the
following four conditions are met, the number of call drops on SDCCH (receive quality) is
incremented by one. First, the downlink quality level multiplied by 10 is higher than
this threshold. Second, the TA is smaller than the TA threshold of the serving cell. Third, the
uplink level is higher than "UL Level Threshold for SDCCH Call Drop". Finally, the
downlink level is lower than "DL Level Threshold for SDCCH Call Drop".
Level threshold for measuring the number of call drops on SDCCH. When call drop occurs
on the SDCCH, the BSC6900 determines whether the uplink receive level is lower than
this threshold. If the uplink receive level is lower than this threshold and the TA is
smaller than the TA threshold of the serving cell, the number of call drops on SDCCH
(receive level) is incremented by one.
Quality threshold for measuring the number of call drops on SDCCH. When call drop occurs
on the SDCCH, the BSC6900 determines whether the uplink quality level multiplied by
10 is higher than this threshold. If all the following four conditions are met, the number of call drops on SDCCH (receive quality) is incremented by one. First, the uplink quality
level multiplied by 10 is higher than this threshold. Second, the TA is smaller than the
TA threshold of the serving cell. Third, the uplink level is higher than "UL Level
Threshold for SDCCH Call Drop". Finally, the downlink level is lower than "DL Level
Threshold for SDCCH Call Drop".
Whether to allow SDCCH dynamic allocation, that is, whether to allow dynamic conversion
between TCHs and SDCCHs.
OFF, ON None OFF
DISABLE, ENABLE None ENABLE
0~60 s 2
0~5 None 1
0~255 s 40
0~63 dB 30
40~70 degree Celsius 53
35.0~55.6 (step: 0.1) V None
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO
Whether to enable the SDCCH quick handover test function. If this parameter is set
to Yes, the BSC6900 initiates intra-cell SDCCH handover as soon as the MSC issues an encrypted command to the MS. Thus, the
forwarding encrypted signaling can be transmitted and received on a new signaling channel. In this way, the network security is
improved.
This parameter specifies whether the BSC6900 automatically shuts down the power amplifier of the TRX to save power when the BTS is powered by batteries after a power
failure.
After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel
only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period
specified by this parameter.
Maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH in a power control period
Period in which level penalty is performed on the neighboring cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The neighboring cells must be located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico
layer other than the Umbrella layer.
Level value of the penalty that is performed on the neighboring cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The neighboring cells must be located at the Macro, Micro, or
Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.
High temperature threshold for triggering power shutdown of the battery. If the power shutdown upon battery high temperature is
enabled and the battery temperature is higher than the value of this parameter, the battery is
automatically powered off.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Low voltage threshold for triggering power shutdown of the battery. If the power
shutdown upon low voltage is enabled and the load voltage is lower than the value of this
parameter, the battery is automatically powered off.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to allow the MS to search for a 3G cell when the BSIC must be decoded
Whether to report the classmark queried by the BSC6900 to the MSC
None NoPriority
None NoPriority
0~6 None None Split position on the RXU chain
SUPPORT, UNSUPPORT None UNSUPPORT
TDM, HDLC, HubBTS, IP None TDM Service bearer mode of the BTS
TDM, HDLC, IP None None Service bearer mode of the BTS
Priority of the notification message transmission on the FACCH. From high to low, the priorities are A, B, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and No Priority. No Priority is the lowest. When
the priority of the group call is higher than or equal to the value specified by this parameter,
Priority of the paging message transmission on the FACCH. From high to low, the
priorities are A, B, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and No Priority. No Priority is the lowest. When the priority of
the group call is higher than the value specified by this parameter, the paging
message is sent on the FACCH.
Whether to enable the BTS to support the separation between the physical and logical.
Whether the BTS supports the separate mode. When a BTS is in separate mode, the physical boards are separate from the logical
TRXs, that is, a physical board may exist without being configured with any logical
TRX. When a BTS is in non-separate mode, a one-to-one mapping exists between the
physical board and the logical TRX.
OML, RSL, EML, ESL, CSVOICE, CSDATA,
PSHIGHPRI, PSLOWPRI, OTHERDATA
Service type of the BTS. The QoS processing depends on the DSCP, VLAN ID, and VLAN
priority that vary according to the service type.
Whether to enable the diesel engine parameters to be configured
Whether to enable the environment temperature alarm parameters of the APMU to be configured. The APMU of the APM30
type does not support this parameter.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the environment temperature parameters to be configured.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
NO, YES None NO
0~5 None None
None Release 99 onwards Protocol version supported by the SGSN
NO, YES None NO Whether to allow sharing
0~12 h 3
NO, YES None NO
ms 2
ms 2
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255 None None
None NONE
Whether to enable the environment humidity alarm parameters of the board to be
configured.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Number of the SFP port. If the switching relation is added on the SFP port, it indicates that the SFP port is used to connect the BBU and no RXU chain or ring can be configured
on the port.
Release 98 or older, Release 99 onwards
This parameter specifies the delay time before shutting down the TRXs when the BTS
experiences a power failure.
Whether to enable a handover between signaling channels
TCH:480~14880, step:480;
SDCCH:470~14570, step:470
Number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal quality of signaling
channels. This parameter helps avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions.
TCH:480~14880, step:480;
SDCCH:470~14570, step:470
Number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength of signaling
channels. This parameter helps avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh fading and to ensure correct handover
decisions.
The IP address must be a valid class A, B, or C address, and it cannot be a broadcast
address or network address.
NOCOMB, PBT, WBANDCOMB,
DIVERSITY, DDIVERSITY, DPBT,
DTIC, NONE
RF send mode of the TRX.The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support Wide Band Combining, Power
Booster Technology, DPBT, or Transmitter Independent or Combining.
The DBS3900 GSM GRRU does not support Wide Band Combining, Transmitter
Independent or Combining, Power Booster Technology, or DPBT.
The BTS3900 GSM and BTS3900A GSM do not support Transmitter Independent or Wide
Band Combining.
None DOUBLE_ANTENNA
None DOUBLE_ANTENNA
None DOUBLE_ANTENNA
SGL_ANTENNA, SGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA,
DOUBLE_ANTENNA, DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENN
A, DOUBLESINGLE_ANTEN
NA, DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTE
NNA
The connection mode between the DRRU and the antenna.
SGL_ANTENNA, SGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA,
DOUBLE_ANTENNA, DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENN
A, DOUBLESINGLE_ANTEN
NA, DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTE
NNA
The connection mode between the DRFU and the antenna.
SGL_ANTENNA, SGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA,
DOUBLE_ANTENNA, DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENN
A, DOUBLESINGLE_ANTEN
NA, DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTE
NNA
The connection mode between the MRRU/GRRU and the antenna.
None DOUBLE_ANTENNA
None SGL_ANTENNA
None
PSMODE, VGCSMODE None PSMODE
PSMODE, VGCSMODE None PSMODE
0~63 dB 30
NO, YES None NO
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None UNSUPPORT
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None UNSUPPORT
SGL_ANTENNA, SGLDOUBLE_ANTENNA,
DOUBLE_ANTENNA, DOUBLEFOUR_ANTENN
A, DOUBLESINGLE_ANTEN
NA, DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTE
NNA
The connection mode between the MRFU/GRFU and the antenna.
SGL_ANTENNA, DOUBLESINGLE_ANTEN
NA, DOUBLEDOUBLE_ANTE
NNA
The connection mode between the BTS3900E and the antenna.
This parameter is used for load control. It determines whether the users of special access class are allowed to access the
network. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is
allowed.
Speech version mode that the BTS uses for the VGCS call number in the timeslot in the
TRX in fallback mode
Speech version mode that the BTS uses for the VGCS call number in the timeslot in the
TRX in fallback mode
Level value of the penalty that is performed on the neighboring cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The neighboring cells must be located at the Macro, Micro, or
Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.
Whether to support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH. The parameter SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is
used to define the DRX period. You can specify whether the paging group based on
SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is supported on CCCH for the BTS and the MS. Yes: the paging group
based on SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is supported on CCCH. No: the paging group based on SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is not supported on
CCCH.
Whether to support In Inter-RAT Inter-cell PS Handover. The MS in the UMTS cell can be
handed over to the BSC local cell through PS handover algorithm.
Whether support Out Inter-RAT Inter-Cell PS Handover. The MS in the BSC local cell can be handed over to the UMTS cell through PS
handover algorithm.
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None UNSUPPORT
NO, YES None NO
None NOT_SUPPORT
None None
None NOT_SUPPORT
0~2047 None None
1~64 characters None None Name of a cell
0~2047 None None
1~64 characters None None Name of a source cell0~65535 None None Source cell ID
None HOALGORITHM1
1~65533, 65535 None None Local area code (LAC) of the source cell
1~3 characters None None Mobile country code (MCC) of the source cell
1~3 characters None None Mobile network code (MNC) of the source cell
None GSM_PRIOR
None None
Cell supports reduced latency capability. This parameter is used to reduce the latency
during the transmission, thus improving the user experience for conversational services.
whether the main operator enables the RanSharing function. If the RanSharing
function is enabled, one to three co-operators can be configured to share the BSS.
SUPPORT, NOT_SUPPORT
Whether a base station supports normalized data configuration. Normalized data
configuration means that the cabinets, subracks, slots, transmission ports, and user-defined alarm ports of a base station under a
multi-mode BSC use the same numbering schemes, and that the boards of the base
station are uniformly named.
SUPPORT, NOT_SUPPORT
Whether the data configuration of the SingleRAN BTS supports normalized
SingleRAN mode. Normalized SingleRAN mode means that the rules of defining cabinet number, subrack number, and slot number of
the SingleRAN BTS are normalized.
SUPPORT, NOT_SUPPORT
Whether the data configuration of the SingleRAN BTS supports normalized
SingleRAN mode. Normalized SingleRAN mode means that the rules of defining cabinet number, subrack number, and slot number of
the SingleRAN BTS are normalized.
A cell Index must be unique in one BSC6900. It is used to uniquely identify a cell.
A source cell index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a source
cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to
2047.
HOALGORITHM1, HOALGORITHM2
Whether the currently used handover algorithm in the source cell is HO Algorithm I
or HO Algorithm II
GSM_PRIOR, UMTS_PRIOR
The parameter specifies which type of service TRXs should be preferentially processed
when the PSU is faulty.
CSVOICE, CSDATA, PSHIGHPRI, PSLOWPRI
Service type of the IP interface board. The service type can be CS speech, CS data, PS
high priority, or PS low priority.
0~63 dB 63
ms 6
ms 2
0~63 dB 63
None None
-99.0~40.0 (step: 0.1) degree Celsius -100
60~600 s 240
DISABLED, ENABLED None ENABLED
DISABLED, ENABLED None DISABLED
After a handover due to bad quality is successful, the penalty on the original serving
cell is performed within the "Penalty Time after BQ HO": the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by "Penalty Level
after BQ HO", to prevent ping-pong handovers.
TCH:480~15360, step:480;
SDCCH:470~15040, step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This parameter specifies
the number of successive measurement reports that are used to determine the signal
strength on traffic/data channels.
TCH:480~15360, step:480;
SDCCH:470~15040, step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. The parameter specifies the number of successive measurement
reports that are used to determine the signal strength on signaling channel.
After the time advancing handover is successful, the penalty on the original serving
cell is performed within the "Penalty Time after TA HO": the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by "Penalty Level
after TA HO", to prevent ping-pong handovers.
1970-1-1 00:00:00~2538-12-31 23:59:59
A key parameter that indicates the date and time when the BSC6900 broadcasts cell
messages
When the environment temperature reaches the specified value of this parameter, the
heater is started.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Time for which the BTS waits to start the fallback function after the OML is interrupted. With this parameter, the BTS does not start
the fallback function when the OML is interrupted transiently.
Whether to enable the smart temperature control mechanism of the FMUA. Smart
temperature control refers to the mechanism adopted by the FMUA to adjust the fan speed,
and thus to regulate the temperature according to the environment temperature.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to enable the smart temperature control mechanism of the NFCB. Smart
temperature control refers to the mechanism adopted by the NFCB to adjust the fan speed,
and thus to regulate the temperature according to the environment temperature.
NO, YES None NO
OFF, ON None OFF
60~300 s 120
None None Start time of frequency scanning
None None Type of the BTS.
16~1023 byte 352
Whether to enable the EICC algorithm. Enhanced Interference Rejection Combining
combines the signals received by multiple antennas to obtain better signals. EICC is
mainly used in high traffic network where tight frequency reuse is in place.
This parameter specifies whether the sending of system information 5, 5bis, and 5ter can be stopped on the SACCH on the SDCCH after
the BTS issues a ciphering command.
Time for which the BTS waits to stop the fallback function after the OML is set up. With
this parameter, the BTS does not stop the fallback function when the OML is set up
Maximum sub-frame length. The data stream to be multiplexed on the same multiplexing channel must be of the same type, and the
length of the packet before multiplexing cannot exceed the maximum subframe
length. If the length of a packet exceeds the maximum subframe length, the packet is
transmitted without being multiplexed.
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None UNSUPPORT
UNSUPPORT, SUPPORT None UNSUPPORT
None T_20
CLOSE, OPEN None None Whether to enable the alarm port
ON, OFF None None Power switch state.
CLOSE, OPEN None None
3~5 None None
SyncCase1, SyncCase2 None None
AISS, GPS None AISS
CONSYN, INTERSYN None None Synchronization mode of the IP clock
1~7 d 1
0~23 h 2
0~59 min 0
This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS
services.
Whether to allow the CS services to preempt the sublink resources of PS services when
the Abis resources are congested
Whether to support the broadcast of the cell name
Whether to support dual transfer mode (DTM). The DTM allows an MS to use the
circuit switching service and the packet switching service at the same time. This
function must be supported by the network side.
Whether to support the enhanced DTM function. Comparing to the DTM, the
enhanced DTM improves the CS setup and release. During the CS service setup, the PS
service is not interrupted.
T_12, T_15, T_20, T_30, T_41, T_55, T_76, T_109,
T_163, T_217
Minimum timeslots between two successive channel requests. After sending the access
request, if the MS does not receive the response message after waiting for the
minimum timeslots between two successive channel requests, the MS resends the access
request.
Whether to enable the 3ah function on the BTS port.
Number of the switching port. If "Link Attribute" is set to "BBU", the switching port
must be configured. The value ranges from 3 to 5.
Synchronization status. This parameter is used to identify different 3G cells. This
parameter should be same with the configuration of 3G cells.
Site synchronization method. AISS stands for the air-interface soft synchronization method, and GPS stands for the GPS synchronization
method.
Interim synchronization period (in days). The BTS can re-initiate the synchronization only
after the period.
Interim synchronization period (in hours). The BTS can re-initiate the synchronization only
after the period.
Interim synchronization period (in minutes). The BTS can re-initiate the synchronization
only after the period.
0, 8~11 None 10
60~2400 (step: 10) ms 12
5~1275, step: 5 ms 50
5~1275, step: 5 ms 50
10~2550, step: 10 ms 200
10~2550, step: 10 ms 60
packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux
control level of the system.
0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 indicates
the highest level.
A load handover is allowed only when the system flux is lower than the value of this
parameter. The handover performed over the maximum threshold may have tremendous
impacts on the system. Thus, this parameter should not be set to a higher value. 1) The flow control level algorithm for the assigned
system messages: [(Average Message Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin
Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin
Threshold) x 100]/10+1 (round-down for division operation). If the value is smaller than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold,
Level 0 is used. If the value is equal to or greater than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the level is calculated. The value
range is from 0 to 11.
2) Flow control threshold for the CPU to start to discard the channel access messages and
paging messages: 80%
. Flow control threshold for the CPU to discard all channel access messages and
paging messages: 100%
. CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to or greater than CPU flow control threshold 80% corresponds
to level 2. An increase of 5% means an
Timer in the LAPD protocol. The value of the timer indicates the time when the LAPD link waits for the response or acknowledgement
frame after sending the command frame.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over the Um interface. For the function of timer
T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. For the function of timer
T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um
interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For the function of timer T200 and
the effect of the parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the
SDCCH.For the function of timer T200 and the effect
of the parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
10~2550, step: 10 ms 150
5~1275, step: 5 ms 60
5~1275, step: 5 ms 60
1~10 s 1
0~2550, step:10 ms 7
1~255 s 10
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um
interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For the function of timer T200 and
the effect of the parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
This parameter specifies the timeout value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um
interface.T200 prevents the data link layer from
deadlock during data transmission. The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-
error data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement
retransmission mechanism.Each message must be confirmed by the peer end. In unknown cases, both ends are waiting if a message is lost. At this time, the deadlock of the system occurs. Therefore, the transmit end must establish a timer. When the timer expires, the transmit end regards that the receive end does not receive the message and then the transmit end retransmits the
message. The number of retransmissions is determined by N200. T200 and the N200
ensure that the data link layer sequentially transmits data and that the transmission is
free from errors.
This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3
services.For the function of timer T200 and the effect
of the parameter, see the description of "T200 SDCCH".
Timer in the LAPD protocol. The value of the timer indicates the maximum duration for no
frame exchange in the LAPD link.
When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, the BTS resends physical information to the MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical information is "Max
Resend Times of Phy.Info.". For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08 and 08.58.
Timer for retransmitting the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message
ms 500ms
ms 500ms
0~1530, step: 6 min 20
ms 4
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None YES
500ms, 1000ms, 1500ms, 2000ms, 2500ms,
3000ms, 3500ms, 4000ms
T3168 is used to set the maximum duration for the MS to wait for the uplink assignment message. After the MS originates the uplink
TBF setup request by sending the packet resource request or the channel request in
the packet uplink acknowledge message, the timer T3168 is started to wait for the packet uplink assignment message on the network side. If the MS receives the packet uplink
assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is reset. Otherwise, the MS originates
the packet access request for four times. Then the MS regards this as the TBF setup
failure.
0ms, 80ms, 120ms, 160ms, 200ms, 500ms,
1000ms, 1500ms
Duration of releasing the TBF after the MS receives the last data block. When the MS receives the RLC data block containing the
flag identifying the last data block and confirms that all the RLC data blocks in the TBF are received, the MS sends the packet downlink acknowledge message containing the last flag acknowledgement and the timer T3192 is started. If the timer T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF related resources and starts monitoring the paging channel. During TBF releasing, if the MS is the half
duplex mode and receives the packet uplink assignment, the MS responds this command.
During TBF releasing, if the MS is the half duplex mode and receives no packet uplink
assignment message, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in the dual
transmission mode, the MS enters the special mode.
This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.
TCH:480~14880, step:480;
SDCCH:470~14570, step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This parameter specifies
the number of measurement reports sampled for filtering the TA.
Whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover
Whether to enable the time advance (TA) handover. The TA handover determines
whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA threshold. When the
TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The longer the distance
is, the greater the TA value is.
0~255 bit 0
0.5~8, step:0.5 s 1
0~255 bit 255
0~255 s 0
ms 2
0.5~0.8, step:0.5 s 1
0~255 bit 63
One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell.When "Enhanced Concentric Allowed" is set
to OFF, "TA Hysteresis", "RX_LEV Threshold", "RX_LEV Hysteresis",
"RX_QUAL Threshold", and "TA Threshold" determine the coverage of the OL subcell and
UL subcell.When "Enhanced Concentric Allowed" is set to ON, "TA Hysteresis", "UtoO HO Received Level Threshold", "OtoU HO Received Level Threshold", "RX_QUAL Threshold", and "TA Threshold" determine the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell.
The P/N criterion must be met for triggering a TA handover. That is, the TA handover can be triggered only if P measurement reports among N measurement reports meet the
triggering conditions. This parameter corresponds to P in the P/N criterion.
An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this
parameter.
This parameter specifies the interval of broadcasting the speech data of the talker on
the downlink group call channel that is controlled by the BTS. When the parameter is
set to 0, the BTS (instead of the BSC6900) performs the broadcasting with the default
interval 5s.
TCH:480~14880, step:480;
SDCCH:470~14570, step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This parameter specifies
the number of measurement reports sampled for filtering the TA on the signaling channel.
The P/N criterion must be met for triggering a TA handover. That is, the TA handover can be triggered only if P measurement reports among N measurement reports meet the
triggering conditions. This parameter corresponds to N in the P/N criterion.
One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell.When "Enhanced Concentric Allowed" is set
to OFF, "TA Hysteresis", "RX_LEV Threshold", "RX_LEV Hysteresis",
"RX_QUAL Threshold", and "TA Threshold" determine the coverage of the OL subcell and
UL subcell.When "Enhanced Concentric Allowed" is set to ON, "TA Hysteresis", "UtoO HO Received Level Threshold", "OtoU HO Received Level Threshold", "RX_QUAL Threshold", and "TA Threshold" determine the coverage of the OL
subcell and UL subcell.
0~25 None 10
0~25 None 10
30~300 s 90
60~300 s 90
0~500 mV 80
NO, YES None NO
0~100 per cent 60
0~1000 per mill 40
Filter period of the signal strength in the packet transmission mode of the MS. The MS
in the packet transmission mode measures the downlink signal strength. This parameter is used to calculate the Cn value of the MS output power. This parameter specifies the
relation between Cn and Cn-1.
Filter period of the signal strength in the packet idle mode of the MS. The MS in the packet idle mode measures the downlink signal strength. This parameter is used to calculate the Cn value of the MS output
power. This parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1.
Maximum time in which the BTS attempts to set up the OML after swapping the main and backup OMLs. If the BTS fails to set up the
OML within this time, the BTS swaps the main and backup OMLs again.
The BTS repeatedly attempts to connect to port 0 or port 1 after the switchover. If the
connection on one port fails within the time specified by this parameter, the BTS tries to
connect to another port.
Temperature compensation coefficient. This parameter defines the charging voltage
increase or decrease unit of each battery when the ambient temperature of the battery
varies with the reference temperature regulated by the vendor by 1 degree Celsius. See the vendor specification for the setting of
this parameter.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Whether to allow the cell to dynamically change a channel from full rate to half rate or from half rate to full rate. If this parameter is set to YES, the conversion is allowed; if the
parameter is set to NO, the conversion is not allowed and the changed channel is restored
to the previous rate mode. In addition, this parameter helps to determine the channel
assignment priority. The channels in a TRX that does not allow dynamic adjustment take
priority.
If the current channel seizure ratio reaches or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is
assigned preferentially; otherwise, the full-rate TCH is assigned preferentially.
When a call drops on the TCH, the corresponding TCH call drop counter is
incremented by one if the DL FER carried in the last MR is greater than the value of this
parameter.
0~63 dB 6
0~70 None 55
0~1000 per mill 40
0~63 dB 6
0~70 None 55
0~60 s 2
0~10 None 3
1~600 s 60
OFF, ON None OFF
0~100 per cent 60
When a call drops on the TCH, the corresponding TCH call drop counter is incremented by one if the downlink level
carried in the last MR is lower than the value of this parameter.
When a call drops on the TCH, the corresponding TCH call drop counter is
incremented by one if the downlink quality carried in the last MR is greater than the
value of this parameter.
When a call drops on the TCH, the corresponding TCH call drop counter is
incremented by one if the UL FER carried in the last MR is greater than the value of this
parameter.
When a call drops on the TCH, the corresponding TCH call drop counter is
incremented by one if the uplink level carried in the last MR is lower than the value of this
parameter.
When a call drops on the TCH, the corresponding TCH call drop counter is incremented by one if the uplink quality carried in the last MR is greater than the
value of this parameter.
After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel
only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period specified by
this parameter.
Maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in a power control period
This parameter specifies the interval at which the speech service on a TCH is handed over.
This parameter specifies whether to perform periodic intra-cell handover for speech
services on TCH.
Threshold for determining that the underlaid subcell is busy. The BSC assigns channels in
the underlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. When "Allow Rate Selection
Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load" is set to YES, half-rate channels are assigned if
the channel seizure ratio in the underlaid subcell exceeds the value of this parameter,
and full-rate channels are assigned if the channel seizure ratio in the underlaid subcell does not exceed the value of this parameter.
0~100 per cent 70
DISABLE, ENABLE None None Whether to enable the class-1 mute detection.
0~4095 None None
AUTO, Manual None None
AUTO, Manual None None
0~42, step: 6 dB 0
dB 8
The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is
greater than the value of this parameter, half-rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-
rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/(Num. of available
TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric cell.
When the "Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load" is set to
Yes, the "TCH Traffic Busy Threshold (%)" is invalid for the concentric cell.
If you enable the TC pool function when configuring the basic information of the
BSC6900, you need to enter the TC Pool ID. The ID must be unique in the entire network.
Input mode of the BA table. In auto mode, the system fills in the BA1 and BA2 tables based on the adjacent relation of cells. In manual
mode, the user maintains the BA table. If the adjacent relation of cells is modified, for
example, a neighboring cell is added or a cell is deleted, the user needs to maintain the BA1
and BA2 tables.
Whether the FDD BA2 table is generated automatically according to the neighboring
relation or typed manually.
When the priority of a TDD cell is ranked, the value of this parameter is added to the
receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement report.
The values of this parameter correspond to the following decibel values:
0: 0 dB1: 6 dB
...7: 42 dB
Negative infinity, -28~28, step: 4
A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect
Diversity of the serving cell.The value of this parameter corresponds to
the following decibel value:0: negative infinity
1: -28 dB2: -24 dB
... 15: 28 dB
dB 0
0~1 None 0
0~16383 None 0
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
0~63 None 10
0~127 None None
0~127 None None
0~36, Positive infinity, step: 6
Threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell is valid.
The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement
report is greater than the value of this parameter. After the valid measurement
report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization.
The value of this parameter corresponds to the following decibel value:
0: 0 dB1: 6 dB
...6: 36 dB
7: positive infinity
This parameter specifies whether to activate the diversity mode on the common channel of
a 3G cell.
Downlink frequency of frequency 1 in table 3GBA2. This parameter indicates the
detected downlink frequency in the 3G adjacent cell list in speech. The parameter is
delivered in the system information 2QUTER/MI.
This parameter specifies whether the TDD MI system information optimized function is
enabled. When this parameter is set to NO and "TDD System Information Optimized
Allowed" is set to YES, the MI system information issued in the TDD scenario does not carry neighboring cell scrambling codes. In other scenarios, the MI system information
carries neighboring cell scrambling codes.
This parameter specifies whether to send the system information MI which contains the 3G
neighboring cell information in the TDD neighboring cell. The value YES(YES)
indicates that the MI is sent, and the value NO(NO) indicates that the MI is not sent.
Minimum RSCP quality threshold that the TDD 3G candidate cell must reach
TDD cell parameter ID. The ID is used to distinguish terminals or cells. This parameter is used after spread spectrum. Therefore, it
does not change the bandwidth of signals, but only distinguishes the signals from different
sources. Through scrambling, multiple transceivers can use the same codes for
spread spectrum.
Cell parameter ID of a TDD cell. The cell parameter ID distinguishes between MSs or
cells. It is used after spread spectrum. Therefore, it distinguishes between the
signals from different sources, but not the changes in the bandwidth of signals. Through scrambling, multiple transceivers can use the
same codes for spread spectrum.
NO, YES None NO
0~1 None None
0.0~500.0 (step: 0.1) mV 800
1~64 characters None None Description of a cell template.
50~70 degree Celsius 65
-40.0~0.0 (step: 0.1) degree Celsius -100
-40.0~0.0 (step: 0.1) degree Celsius -100
None None Content of the cell broadcast message
0~65535 None 65535
220~280 V 264
This parameter specifies whether to optimize the system information 2Quater and MI of the TDD neighboring cell. That is, to add an FDD neighboring cell information before the TDD
neighboring cell information to solve the compatibility problem of some dual-mode
MSs.
SyncCase in the TDDBA1 table. This parameter determines the synchronization status. Value 0 indicates Sync case 1 and
value 1 indicates Sync case 2. This parameter is used to identify different 3G
cells.
Change value of the floating charge voltage of the storage battery when the temperature of
the storage battery changes by 1 degree Celsius.
When the temperature of the BTS cabinet is greater than the value of this parameter, the
TRX is powered off.
TRX power-off temperature threshold. If the temperature of the BTS cabinet is less than
the value of this parameter while "Low Temperature Startup Allowed" is set to "Yes",
the TRX is powered off.
TRX power-off temperature threshold. If the temperature of the BTS cabinet is less than
the value of this parameter while "Low Temperature Startup Allowed" is set to "Yes",
the TRX is powered off.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
This parameter indicates start frame number of the BTS. It is used to keep synchronization between the BTS and MS after the BTS is re-
initialized.
Voltage threshold for switching off the air conditioner. If the power supply voltage is less than this threshold, the air conditioner needs to be switched off to decrease the impact on
the BTS.
220~280 V 264
1~10 None 10
1~10 None 6
1~10 None 4
1~10 None 8
1~10 None 4
1~10 None 3
1~10 None 6
1~10 None 3
1~10 None 2
Voltage threshold for switching on the air conditioner. This parameter assumes that the
air conditioner is switched off. If the power supply voltage is greater than this threshold, the air conditioner needs to be switched on to
ensure that the BTS runs properly.
Combination of the THP1 and ARP1 priority in the Interactive service. THP1-ARP1 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Combination of the THP1 and ARP2 priority in the Interactive service. THP1-ARP2 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Combination of the THP1 and ARP3 priority in the Interactive service. THP1-ARP3 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Combination of the THP2 and ARP1 priority in the Interactive service. THP2-ARP1 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Combination of the THP2 and ARP2 priority in the Interactive service. THP2-ARP2 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Combination of the THP2 and ARP3 priority in the Interactive service. THP2-ARP3 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Combination of the THP3 and ARP1 priority in the Interactive service. THP3-ARP1 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Combination of the THP3 and ARP2 priority in the Interactive service. THP3-ARP2 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
Combination of the THP3 and ARP3 priority in the Interactive service. THP3-ARP3 priority weight determines the number of the budget
blocks and the block scheduling priority.
0~63 dB 30
0~7 None 1
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 4
0~100 per cent 80
During channel assignment, the assignment of channels on the BCCH TRXs depends on
the uplink receive level, quality, and non-BCCH load. The TCHs are preferentially
assigned on the BCCH TRXs if the following conditions are met:
1. The uplink receive level after filtering is higher than "Level Thresh. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH".
2. The uplink receive quality level after filtering is lower than "Quality Thresh. for
Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH".
3. The non-BCCH load is higher than "Intracell Non Main BCCH Load Threshold of
TIGHT BCCH".
During channel assignment, the assignment of channels on the BCCH TRXs depends on
the uplink receive level, quality, and non-BCCH load. The TCHs are preferentially
assigned on the BCCH TRXs if the following conditions are met:
1. The uplink receive level after filtering is higher than "Level Thresh. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH".
2. The uplink receive quality level after filtering is lower than "Quality Thresh. for
Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH".
3. The non-BCCH load is higher than "Intracell Non Main BCCH Load Threshold of
TIGHT BCCH".
The P/N criterion must be met for triggering a TIGHT BCCH handover. That is, the TIGHT BCCH handover can be triggered only if P
seconds among N seconds meet the triggering conditions. This parameter corresponds to P in the P/N criterion.
During channel assignment, the assignment of channels on the BCCH TRXs depends on
the uplink receive level, quality, and non-BCCH load. The TCHs are preferentially
assigned on the BCCH TRXs if the following conditions are met:
1. The uplink receive level after filtering is higher than "Level Thresh. for Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH".
2. The uplink receive quality level after filtering is lower than "Quality Thresh. for
Assigning Main BCCH Carrier Channel Under TIGHT BCCH".
3. The non-BCCH load is higher than "Intracell Non Main BCCH Load Threshold of
TIGHT BCCH".
0.5~16, step:0.5 s 6
0~7 None 3
OFF, ON None OFF
0~63 dB 40
0, 5~1440 min None Duration of frequency scanning
0~255 s 10
0~255 s 10
0~255 s 10
1~20 (step: 1) ms 2
0~255 s 10
The P/N criterion must be met for triggering a TIGHTBCCH handover. That is, the
TIGHTBCCH handover can be triggered only if P seconds among N seconds meet the
triggering conditions. This parameter corresponds to N in the P/N criterion.
When an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover needs to be performed (handover from the non-BCCH to BCCH), the downlink receive
quality must be smaller than the value of this parameter.
Whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm
If the SDCCH load on the TRXs of the compatible BCCH in loose frequency reuse pattern is greater than the "IBCA Loose Trx
SDCCH Load Threshold", and when the uplink receive level from the MS to the BTS is greater than the threshold, the SDCCHs on the TRXs of the compatible non-BCCH are
preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the SDCCHs on the TRXs of the compatible
BCCH are preferentially assigned.
Within the preset time, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or
channel mismatch.
After a handover due to bad quality is successful, the penalty on the original serving
cell is performed within the "Penalty Time after BQ HO": the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by "Penalty Level
after BQ HO", to prevent ping-pong handovers.
After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover of an MS fails, the MS does not perform OL
subell-UL subcell handovers within the value of the parameter.
Longest waiting time for multiplexingWhen the multiplexed packet is no longer
added with new data and the timer expires, the multiplexed packet is transmitted directly.This parameter is determined by the number of multiplexed packets. When the number of multiplexed packets increases, the value of
this parameter increases.
After the fast handover is successful, the penalty on the original serving cell is
performed within the "Quick handover punish time": the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by "Quick handover punish
value", to prevent ping-pong handovers.
NO, YES, NULL None NO
0~255 s 30
10~255 s 40
1~30 s 8
-99~70 degree Celsius 45
2~4 s 3
0~7 None 0
This parameter determines whether the dynamic voltage adjustment function is enabled on the basis of the number of
timeslots. If this parameter is set to YES, the power consumption of base stations is
reduced. This parameter maps the versions of base stations. If the parameter is set to NULL,
base stations do not support this function.
After the time advancing handover is successful, the penalty on the original serving
cell is performed within the "Penalty Time after TA HO": the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by "Penalty Level
after TA HO", to prevent ping-pong handovers.
After an UL subcell to OL subcell handover of an MS fails, the MS does not perform UL
subcell to OL subcell handovers within the value of the parameter.
This parameter indicates the queue timer for assignment.
When the BSC6900 receives an assignment request and no channel is available for
assignment, the BSC6900 starts the queuing procedure and the timer. If the channel
request is successful before the timer expires, the timer stops. If the timer expires, the
channel assignment fails.
Lowest expected value of the air outlet temperature.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Duration time for determining that a call is hung up because of poor quality. If the uplink
quality or downlink quality in the measurement reports during the period of Timer for "Bad Quality DISC Statistic" is
higher than the value of "Bad Quality Disconnection Threshold" before the call is
disconnected, you can infer that the call disconnection is due to poor quality. This parameter can be used to calculate the
number of call disconnections due to poor quality.
Cell Reselect Temporary Offset (TO) indicates the temporary correction of C2. This
parameter is valid only within the value specified by "Cell Reselect Penalty Time". For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.
1~30 s 8
None None
HDLC IP None None Transmission Type
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
NO, YES None NO
Length of the timer that is started to wait for a channel requested by an incoming BSC
handover request message.When the MSC allows the queuing of incoming BSC handover requests, the
BSC6900 starts the queuing procedure and the timer if no channel is available for assignment. If the channel request is
successful before the timer expires, the timer stops. If the timer expires, the incoming BSC
handover fails.
TER_TRANS, SAT_TRANS,
TER_AND_SAT_TRANS
This parameter specifies the data transmission mode between the BTS and the
BSC6900. The license control modes are different in different transmission modes.
Terrestrial Transmission: The data between the BTS and the BSC6900 is transmitted through the E1 or fiber. This transmission
mode has a short delay and is not controlled by the license.
Satellite Transmission: The data between the BTS and the BSC6900 is transmitted through the satellite. This transmission mode has a long delay and is controlled by the license.
Terrestrial and Satellite: In normal cases, the terrestrial transmission mode is used. When
the terrestrial transmission is faulty, the satellite transmission mode is used. This transmission mode is controlled by the
license.
Whether to configure the optical transmission mode for E1 port 0 of the
BTS3006C/BTS3002E. If the optical transmission mode is configured, the
BSC6900 can connect to the BTS through optical fibers.
Whether to configure the optical transmission mode for E1 port 1 of the
BTS3006C/BTS3002E. If the optical transmission mode is configured, the
BSC6900 can connect to the BTS through optical fibers.
Whether to configure the optical transmission mode for E1 port 2 of the
BTS3006C/BTS3002E . If the optical transmission mode is configured, the
BSC6900 can connect to the BTS through optical fibers.
Whether to configure the optical transmission mode for E1 port 3 of the
BTS3006C/BTS3002E. If the optical transmission mode is configured, the
BSC6900 can connect to the BTS through optical fibers.
s 10sec Forbidden time of cell reselection
0~100 None 90
OFF, ON None None Transmission resources mapping switch
None AllowReCheckRes
0~3071 None None
0~3071 None None
0~8 None None Allowed number of carriers bound to a board.
NO, YES None YES
None None Type of the TRX board bound to the TRX
5sec, 10sec, 15sec, 20sec, 30sec, 60sec,
120sec, 300sec, no use
The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of
this parameter.
TRXAid_NotAllow, AllowReForbid, AllowReImmed,
AllowReCheckRes
Whether to enable the TRX aiding function. Four aiding modes are available. BCCH
aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell. BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback
functions after the originally configured BCCH TRX is recovered. Baseband FH aiding:
When the TRX involved in baseband FH in the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is performed in the cell, baseband FH aiding occurs and the cell is initialized as a non-hopping cell.
Baseband FH aiding switchback: When all the TRXs involved in baseband hopping in the
cell are recovered and the originally configured BCCH TRX is normal, baseband FH aiding switchback can be performed and
the cell is restored to the baseband FH mode.
Index of a TRX, uniquely identifying a TRX in a BSC6900.
The ID of TRX added in the main location group, the TRX ID must be globally unique.
The same TRX cannot be bound by the TRX boards in a same location group for multiple
times.
This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel
assignment. When the parameter is set to YES, the smaller the parameter "TRX Priority"
in the command "SET GTRXDEV" is, the higher priority the TRX is. Under other conditions, channels are preferentially
allocated from high-priority TRXs.
TRX, TRU, QTRU, DRRU, DRFU, MRRU, MRFU,
GRFU, GRRU, BTS3900B, BTS3900E
0~7 None None
0~512 None None
NO, YES None NO
0~127 None None
None None
0~50 W 20
8K, 16K, 32K, 64K kbit/s None Rate of the monitoring timeslot
CHAIN, RING None None
0~8 None 6
00:00~23:59 None 0:00
00:00~23:59 None 0:00
The TSC is short for the Training Sequence Code.
The TSC must be the same as the BCC. The delay equalization is performed by using the specified TSC when the MS or BTS receives
the signal. The demodulation cannot be received because the delay equalization cannot be performed for the signals with
same frequency using different TSCs. This can effectively prevent incorrectly invalid
reception, and prevent the co-channel interference.
Number of idle timeslots. You can configure up to 128 idle timeslots for the BTS at a time. A BTS can be configured with up to 512 idle
timeslots.
Whether to allow TSC planning. If this parameter is set to No, the TSC values in all MA groups of the cell cannot be modified. In this case, the TSC values are automatically
refreshed to the BCC values of the cell.
Index of the monitoring timeslot. The index is unique in a BTS.
The 64 kbit/s timeslots on the port are numbered from 1 to 31.
Maximum degree by which the output power of the multi-density TRX board can exceed
the maximum output power within a short time
RXU topology type, that is, RXU ring topology or RXU chain topology. In the case of the ring topology, the optical ports of the head and tail boards must be specified. In the case of the chain topology, only the optical port of the
head board must be specified.
If the number of channels (including PDCH and TCH) occupied on a cell that can be disabled is lower than this threshold, the procedure for disabling the cell can be
triggered.
This parameter specifies the end time of a period during which the cell is disabled.
This parameter specifies the start time of a period during which the cell is disabled.
None None
0~100 per cent 80
None TX_32
None T_20
DISABLE, ENABLE, SLEEPING
This parameter specifies whether to enable the Dynamic Cell Power Off feature. When this parameter is set to ENABLE, the BSC
can disable the cell within the period of time specified by "TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME" and
"TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME";When this parameter is set to DISABLE, the BSC will never disable the cell; When this parameter is set to SLEEP, the BSC will
disable the cell unconditionally within "TURNOFFCELLSTRTIME" and
"TURNOFFCELLSTPTIME",and enable the cell unconditionally within the other
time.Currently, this parameter can be set to SLEEPING only for the BTS3900E. For other base stations, this parameter cannot be set to
SLEEPING.
When the load of the same coverage cell is higher than this threshold for a period, the
The relations between this parameter and the configuration of the CCCH are as follows:
When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 55 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share
a physical channel.When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50,
S is 41 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 76 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a
physical channel.When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is
52 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 5, 10, or 20, S is 109 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share
a physical channel.When this parameter is set to 5, 10, or 20, S
is 58 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 163 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share
a physical channel.When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S
is 86 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel.
When this parameter is set to 7, 12, or 32, S is 217 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share
a physical channel.When this parameter is set to 7, 12, or 32, S
is 115 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel.
The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of {0, 1...,
MAX(T, 8)-1}. The number of timeslots (excluding the
timeslot used to send messages) between two adjacent channel request messages is a
random value from the collection of {S, S+1, ..., S+T-1}.
When T increases, the interval between two
T_2, T_3, T_4, T_5, T_6, T_7, T_8, T_9, T_10,
T_12, T_14, T_16, T_20, T_25, T_32, T_50
Extension transmission timeslots of random access. This parameter determines the
interval of sending another channel request after the MS fails to request a channel.
None None
None None
GSM900, DCS1800 None None
0~15 None 0 Power attenuation factor of uplink tributary 0
NO, YES None None Whether there is a TMA on uplink tributary 0
0~15 None 0 Power attenuation factor of uplink tributary 1
NO, YES None None Whether there is a TMA on uplink tributary 1
0~99 None 80
0~64 None 64
1~8 characters None None
ms 3
1~30 dB 14
GSM900, DCS1800, GSM900_DCS1800, GSM850, PCS1900,
GSM850_1800, GSM850_1900
This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated
frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be
changed.GSM900: The cell supports GSM900
frequency band.DCS1800: The cell supports DCS1800
frequency band.GSM900_DCS1800: The cell supports
GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency bands.GSM850: The cell supports GSM850
frequency band.GSM850_DCS1800: The cell supports
GSM850 and DCS1800 frequency bands.PCS1900: The cell supports PCS1900
frequency band.GSM850_PCS1900: The cell supports
GSM850 and PCS1900 frequency bands.
GSM900, DCS1800, GSM850, PCS1900
Frequency band to which the newly added cell belongs. Only one frequency band can be selected as the frequency band of each new
cell and it cannot be changed after the selection. To modify the frequency band of the new cell, you must delete the cell and
then add it again.
Cell type. Currently, the fast BTS construction is available for only GSM900 and DCS1800
cells.
Upper humidity threshold for the environment alarm box to report an alarm indicating that
the ambient humidity is too high. If the ambient humidity of the BTS is higher than this threshold, the environment alarm box
reports the alarm.In multi-mode scenario, the value of this
parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Used to identify the uplink access message from the MS. The value 64 is invalid.
Upper limit of the alarm. This parameter is valid for the analog port.
TCH:480~122400, step:480;
SDCCH:470~119850, step:470
Minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands
Current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the
threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
1~30 dB 14
1~30 dB 16
1~30 dB 16
0.5~4, step:0.5 s 1
0.5~4, step:0.5 s 1
0~240 ms 180
0~63 dB 10
1~10 None 3
1~30 dB 16
1~30 dB 16
1~30 dB 18
1~30 dB 18
Current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the
threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
Current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than
the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
Current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than
the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
The P/N criterion must be met for triggering a UL BQ handover. That is, the UL BQ handover can be triggered only if P
measurement reports among N measurement reports meet the triggering conditions. This
parameter corresponds to P in the P/N criterion.
The P/N criterion must be met for triggering a UL BQ handover. That is, the UL BQ handover can be triggered only if P
measurement reports among N measurement reports meet the triggering conditions. This
parameter corresponds to N in the P/N criterion.
Duration for uplink data transmission on the original channel if the TC resources are changed before and after the handover
If the UL receive level remains lower than the "Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold" for a period, the edge handover is triggered.
Filter adjustment factor for uplink power control. If this parameter is set to a large
value, the filtered values become smooth, thus reducing the impact of poor
measurement reports on the filtered values. If this parameter is set to a small value, the filter values are close to the actual ones and thus
the power control speed is increased.
Current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the
threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
Current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.
Current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the
threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.
Current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.
0~15 None 2
0~15 None 3
0~15 None 3
0~15 None 3
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
0~15 None 4
0~15 None 15
0~15 None 2
0~15 None 2
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
ms 5
1~30 dB 6
1~30 dB 8
0~3 None 0
0~7 None 0
0~7 None 3
ms 5
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, in consideration of the accuracy of a
single measurement report, the measurement values in certain measurement reports are
filtered to represent the radio operating environment. This parameter specifies the
number of measurement reports sampled for filtering the uplink signal strength.
Maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power
Maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases the uplink transmit power
After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period
before affirming the effect of the power control. Therefore, the MR that power control decision is based on cannot accurately reflect
the radio environment during the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the
MS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.To compensate the delay of power
adjustment, the power control algorithm implements the prediction and filtering
function. In other words, the BSC samples several uplink measurement reports,
performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports from the current time
onwards in a short period. This parameter determines the number of
uplink measurement reports predicted by the BSC. In other words, the value of this
parameter equals to the previous number N.
The MS transmit power is decreased only when the quality level of the MS transmit
signal is smaller than the value of the parameter. If (the uplink receive level - MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual) is smaller than "UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold", the MS
transmit power is not adjusted.
The MS transmit power is increased only when the quality level of the MS transmit
signal is greater than the value of the parameter. If (the uplink receive level + MAX
Up Adj. PC Value by Qual) is greater than "UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold", the MS transmit
power is not adjusted.
TCH:480~9600, step:480; SDCCH:470~9400,
step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This parameter specifies
the number of measurement reports sampled for filtering the uplink signal quality.
0~7 None 3
0~63 dB 5
0~70 None 55
0~70 None 60
0~70 None 55
0~10 None 3
ms 3
0~63 dB 18
0~63 dB 18
ms 1
In the case of power control, when the uplink receive quality is not smaller than "UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold", the actual "UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" is increased by "UL Qual.
Bad UpLEVDiff".
In the case of power control, when the uplink receive quality is not smaller than "UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold", the actual "UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold" is increased by "UL Qual.
Bad UpLEVDiff".
An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is
not smaller than "UL Qual. Threshold".
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An
emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
greater than the value of this parameter.
The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An
emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is
greater than the value of this parameter.
This parameter specifies the uplink signal strength factor multiplied by 10 during the
calculation of the uplink power control step. The uplink signal strength factor is a
coefficient indicating how much the signal strength is considered during the calculation
of the uplink power control step.
TCH:0~9120, step:480; SDCCH:0~8930, step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This parameter specifies
the number of measurement reports sampled for exponent filtering of the uplink signal
strength.
When the uplink receive level reaches the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.
When the uplink receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is
performed.
TCH:0~9120, step:480; SDCCH:0~8930, step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This parameter specifies
the number of measurement reports sampled for slide-window filtering of the uplink signal
strength.
0~10 None 6
ms 3
ms 1
0~100 None 6
0~100 None 75
0~63 dB 30
0~63 dB 18
0~63 dB 15
This parameter specifies the uplink quality level factor multiplied by 10 during the
calculation of the uplink power control step. The uplink quality level factor is a coefficient
indicating how much the quality level is considered during the calculation of the uplink
power control step.
TCH:0~9120, step:480; SDCCH:0~8930, step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This parameter specifies
the number of measurement reports sampled for exponent filtering of the uplink signal
quality.
TCH:0~9120, step:480; SDCCH:0~8930, step:470
When the network receives measurement reports, the measurement values in several straight measurement reports are filtered to
reflect the radio operating environment for the sake of accuracy. This parameter specifies
the number of measurement reports sampled for slide-window filtering of the uplink signal
quality.
Signal strength factor for the protective limitation on calculating the uplink power
control adjustment step. The calculated step value cannot exceed the step value that is obtained on the basis of the signal strength
protection factor and the signal quality protection factor.
Signal strength factor for the protective limitation on calculating the uplink power
control adjustment step. The calculated step value cannot exceed the step value that is obtained on the basis of the signal strength
protection factor and the signal quality protection factor.
When the uplink receive level reaches the threshold, Huawei II power control is
performed.
When the uplink receive level is below the threshold, Huawei II power control is
performed.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
0~63 dB 19
0~63 dB 28
0~63 dB 23
0~63 dB 31
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
0~63 dB 63
0~63 dB 21
0~63 dB 25
NO, YES None YES
NO, YES None NO
0~255 s 10
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to
the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference
ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB;
and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.
Whether a UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed
Whether the crosstalk optimization function over the Um interface is allowed. If this
parameter is set to YES when call drops occur on the Um interface, this function can avoid crosstalk due to very early assignment
of the channel that is not released.If this parameter is set to YES and the
ongoing service is speech service, the BSC also sends the Channel Release message to
the MS and starts the timer T3109 when a call drop occurs upon the reception of the Conn Fail or Err Ind message reported by the MS.
Timer of penalty on a neighboring cell when a handover fails due to faults of air interface
connection.
10~3500 mA 40
10~3500 mA 40
10~3500 mA 40
10~3500 mA 60
10~3500 mA 60
10~3500 mA 60
0~2047 None None
0~2047 None None
BYNAME, BYID None None
BYNAME, BYID None None Index type of the upper-level BTS
1~64 characters None None
1~64 characters None None
Abnormally alarm triggering threshold when the ANT_A tributary antenna current is too light. When the actual current is lower than
the configured value, the ALD Current Abnormally Alarm is triggered with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 1.
Abnormally alarm triggering threshold when the ANT_B tributary antenna current is too light. When the actual current is lower than
the configured value, the ALD Current Abnormally Alarm is triggered with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 1.
Abnormally alarm triggering threshold when the RET tributary antenna current is too light.
When the actual current is lower than the configured value, the ALD Current Abnormally
Alarm is triggered with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 1.
Abnormally alarm clearance triggering threshold when the ANT_A tributary antenna current is too light. When the actual current is
higher than the configured value, the ALD Current Abnormally Alarm disappears with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 1.
Abnormally alarm clearance triggering threshold when the ANT_B tributary antenna current is too light. When the actual current is
higher than the configured value, the ALD Current Abnormally Alarm disappears with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 1.
Abnormally alarm clearance triggering threshold when the RET tributary antenna
current is too light. When the actual current is higher than the configured value, the ALD Current Abnormally Alarm disappears with the corresponding alarm tributary No. of 1.
Index of upper-level BTS connected to the BTS
Number of the upper-level BTS. The number is unique in a BSC6900.
Index type of upper-level BTS connected to the BTS
Name of the upper-level BTS connected to the BTS. The BTS name is unique within a
same BSC6900. This parameter cannot contain , ; = " ' more than two (include two) %, more than two (include two) space, more than
three (include three) +.
Name of the upper-level BTS. The name is unique in a BSC6900. The invalid characters (\, /, :, *, ?, ", <, >, |, and #) cannot appear in
the name.
0~15 None None
CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4 None CS1
None MCS2
10~70 None 20
None MCS6
None UNFIXED
Update code for a simple cell broadcast message.
This parameter together with "Code" uniquely identifies a cell broadcast message.
Default coding scheme of the uplink GPRS link. If the uplink adopts the dynamic
adjustment coding scheme, this parameter can be used to set the coding scheme for
transmission during initial access. If the uplink uses the fixed coding scheme, the TBF uses
Default coding scheme of the uplink EDGE link. If the uplink adopts the dynamic
adjustment coding scheme, this parameter can be used to set the coding scheme for
transmission during initial access. If the uplink uses the fixed coding scheme, the TBF uses
the fixed coding scheme.
Uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. When the subscriber number on the channel reaches the value (threshold/10), the dynamic channel conversion application is
triggered. We recommand that the value of "Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic
Channel Conversion" should be less than "PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold" for
triggering converting dynamic channel in time and reducing PDCH multiplex.
Fixed coding scheme that is used on the uplink EGPRS2-A link. If the uplink uses the fixed coding scheme, this parameter can be
set to any one in MCS1-6 and UAS7-11. If the uplink uses the dynamic coding scheme, this
parameter can be set to UNFIXED.
0~5000 ms 2000
None UNFIXED
None UNFIXED
0~70 None 40
0~63 dB 30
10~255 s 30
0~96 None None
NO, YES None YES Whether to allow MS power control
Inactive period of extended uplink TBF. After the network side receives the last uplink RLC
data block (CountValue=0) of the MS supporting the extended uplink TBF, the uplink TBF is not released immediately.
Instead, the uplink TBF is set to the inactive state. In the inactive period, if the MS needs
to transmit the uplink RLC data block, the MS can use the inactive uplink TBF without
rebuilding a new uplink TBF. This inactive uplink TBF is switched to the active state automatically. At the end of the inactive
period, if the MS does not transmit the uplink RLC data block, the network side sends the
message Packet Uplink Ack/Nack to notify the MS of releasing the uplink TBF. When the
uplink TBF is inactive, the downlink TBF can be established according to this uplink TBF. 0: disable the function of the extended uplink
TBF (this function can be disabled on the BSC side).
CS1, CS2, CS3, CS4, UNFIXED
Adjustment mode of the uplink GPRS link coding scheme. If the fixed coding scheme is used, this parameter is a value ranging from CS1 to CS4. If the dynamic coding scheme is
Coding scheme of the uplink EDGE link. If the uplink uses the fixed coding scheme, this parameter is set to a value ranging from MCS1 to MCS9. If the uplink uses the
dynamic adjustment coding scheme, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.
One of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference exists. If the uplink level is not smaller than "Interf.of UL Level
Threshold" and the uplink quality of the channel is not less than "Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold", the uplink interference exists.
One of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference exists. If the uplink level is not smaller than "Interf.of UL Level
Threshold" and the uplink quality of the channel is not less than "Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold", the uplink interference exists.
Maximum time in which a user uses the uplink of its VGCS call continuously when the
BTS works in fallback mode
Size of the OML/ESL/EML Uplink LAPD Window
1~16 s 4
0.1~1, step:0.1 None 6
1~16 s 5
NO, YES None NO
0~300 ms 120
0~64 per cent 10
0~64 per cent 5
If the difference between uplink receive levels of calls within the same timeslot is greater
than "Offset of the difference between uplink received levels" for P seconds among N
seconds, the call with weak uplink receive level within the timeslot will be handed over to another timeslot. This parameter corresponds
to P in the P/N criterion.
After the existing uplink receive level, uplink receive level after the previous optimization, and the value of this parameter are weight-averaged, the uplink receive level after the
optimization at this time is obtained and used for determing the difference between the
uplink receive levels.
If the difference between uplink receive levels of calls within the same timeslot is greater
than "Offset of the difference between uplink received levels" for P seconds among N
seconds, the call with weak uplink receive level within the timeslot will be handed over to another timeslot. This parameter corresponds
to N in the P/N criterion.
This parameter specifies whether the transmission of point-to-point short messages is disabled. If necessary, the transmission of the uplink short messages in a specific cell
can be disabled so that sufficient radio channels can be seized by normal calls.
Delay of releasing the non-extended uplink TBF. After receiving the last uplink RLC data
block (CountValue=0), the network side sends the message Packet Uplink Ack/Nack with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing the uplink TBF. After this parameter is set, the
network side notifies the MS of releasing this TBF after specified delay. In this way, the downlink TBF can be established on the
unreleased uplink TBF. This uplink TBF is automatically released when the downlink
TBF is established or when the delay duration exceeds the time set by the uplink non-
extended TBF. If this parameter is set to 0, the release delay of non-extended TBF is
disabled.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the uplink TBF is changed from CS2 to CS1. When the retransmission rate of the
uplink TBF is greater than or equal to this threshold, the coding mode of the uplink TBF
is changed from CS2 to CS1.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the uplink TBF is changed from CS3 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the
uplink TBF is greater than or equal to this threshold, the coding mode of the uplink TBF
is changed from CS3 to CS2.
0~64 per cent 5
0~64 per cent 5
0~64 per cent 2
0~64 per cent 2
FORBID, PERMIT None PERMIT
None None
None None
-99~99 degree Celsius 50
0~8 None 3
0~255 s 10
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the uplink TBF is changed from CS4 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the
uplink TBF is greater than or equal to this threshold, the coding mode of the uplink TBF
is changed from CS4 to CS3.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the uplink TBF is changed from CS1 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the
uplink TBF is less than or equal to this threshold, the coding mode of the uplink TBF
is changed from CS1 to CS2.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the uplink TBF is changed from CS2 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the
uplink TBF is less than or equal to this threshold, the coding mode of the uplink TBF
is changed from CS2 to CS3.
Retransmission threshold when the coding mode of the uplink TBF is changed from CS3 to CS4. When the retransmission rate of the
uplink TBF is less than or equal to this threshold, the coding mode of the uplink TBF
is changed from CS3 to CS4.
Whether to allow cell urgent reselection. If this parameter is set to PERMIT and [NC2 Load
Reselection Switch is set to Support, the load of the target cell is involved in the algorithm
for NC2 cell reselection.
HOUR 0~23MINUTE 0~59
Start time when the TRX energy saving function is enabled for the BTS3002E.
HOUR 0~23MINUTE 0~59
End time when the TRX energy saving function is enabled for the BTS3002E.
Upper temperature threshold for the environment alarm box to report an alarm
indicating that the ambient temperature is too high. If the ambient temperature of the BTS is
higher than this threshold, the environment alarm box reports the alarm.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in this mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
When a UL subcell-OL subcel handover decision is performed to a call, the BSC
determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the "MaxRetry Time after
UtoO Fail". If the number reaches the threshold, the UL subcell to OL subcell
handover is prohibited. Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed.
After an MS performs a OL subcell to UL subcell handover successfully, the MS cannot be handed over to the OL subcell again within
the value of the parameter.
0~63 dB 35
NO, YES None NO
1~255 s 5
1~63 dB 5
FDD, TDD None None
2 characters None None Vendor code of the RET antenna
One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL
subcell. "UtoO HO Received Level Threshold", "OtoU HO Received Level
Threshold", "ReceiveQualThrshAMRFR", "TA Threshold", and "TA Hysteresis" determine
the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell.
When this parameter is set to YES, the existing call is performed in the OL subcell,
and "OL to UL HO Allowed" is set to YES, an OL subcell to UL subcell handover is
triggered if the traffic volume in the UL subcell is smaller than "En Iuo Out Cell Low Load
Thred".If the existing call is performed in the UL
subcell, a UL subcell to OL subcell handover is triggered, and "UL to OL HO Allowed" is set
to YES, the timer is started and the calls in the UL subcell are hierarchically handed over
to the OL subcell if the traffic volume in the UL subcell reaches "En Iuo Out Cell General
OverLoad Thred". Otherwise, if the traffic volume in the UL subcell is smaller than "En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Thred", the timer stops, and hierarchical handovers are
not performed.If this parameter is set to NO, the traffic
volume in the UL subcell is not taken into account for triggering the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL
subcell handover in an enhanced concentric cell.
Hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL
subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general
overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the
hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the OL subcell
by level. This parameter indicates the duration for which each each level of
handover lasts.
Hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell
This parameter specifies the type of a 3G cell. A cell type can be Frequency Division Duplex
(FDD) or Time Division Duplex (TDD).
0~190, 255 None 255
None No_Priority
0~190 None 0
NO, YES None NO
2~4094 None 2 VLAN ID of the service type
0~7 None 0
NO, YES None NO VLAN switch for the service type
None Speech version supported by a cell
0~12 None 2
0~12 None 2
4000~33000 ms 27000
This parameter is used to limit the maximum number of channels that can be used by the
VGCS in a cell. This prevents too many channels in the cell from being occupied by the VGCS and thus prevents public network
services from being affected. When this parameter is set to 255, the maximum
number is not limited.
No_Priority, Public_Network_First,
VGCS_First
This parameter specifies whether the preemption of channels between public
network services and the VGCS is allowed when preemption conditions are met.
This parameter is used to reserve a certain number of channels in a cell for the Voice
Group Call Service (VGCS) to use directly. The specified channels are unavailable to
public network services.
Is VIP Cell.The parameter is used for BSC6900 flow control.
VLAN priority level of the service type. This parameter helps to determine the packet
service priority level at the data link layer on the Ethernet. If this parameter is set to 0, the
service type has the highest VLAN priority level. If this parameter is set to 7, the service
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter
together with "VSWR TRX error threshold" is used to detect whether the antenna system
connected to the TRX is faulty.
This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with "VSWR TRX unadjusted
threshold" are used to check whether the antenna system connecting to the TRX is
faulty. If the value of this parameter is smaller, the error is smaller.
This timer is used to set the time of waiting for a ReleaseIndication message after a
ChannelRelease message is sent. If the timer expires, the channel is deactivated.
3000~34000 ms 34000
3000~34000 ms 26000
1~30 s 15
0~60 s 4
INACTIVE, ACTIVE None INACTIVE
None None
INACTIVE, ACTIVE None INACTIVE
0~24 h 22
5~1275, step:5 min 12
When the BSC6900 sends a ChannelRelease message and the current call uses the
AMRFR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is started. If the BSC6900 receives
the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is stopped. If the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC6900
deactivates the channel.
When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and the current call uses the
AMRHR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is started. If the BSC receives the
ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is stopped. If the timer T3109
(AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.
The TCHs reserved for the emergency call are assigned to the user during the service
assignment. If the TCHs are not assigned to the emergency call within a period, the TCHs
are released from the reservation queue.
When the dynamic PDCH needs to use MAIO of the SDCCH, the SDCCH is not allowed to be assigned to new calls within the value of
the parameter. After the timer expires, check whether the SDCCH is idle. If the SDCCH is idle, MAIO of the SDCCH is allowed to be preempted. If the channel is not idle, the MAIO is not allowed to be preempted.
Whether to start the heating equipment of the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
East_Longitude, West_Longitude
This parameter is used to select the location of a cell, east or west longitude.
Whether to start the humidification equipment of the BTS.
In multi-mode scenario, the value of this parameter in one mode must be the same as the value of the corresponding parameter in
another mode.
Time when the BTS stops checking for a radio link alarm. If this time is up, the BTS stops checking for or reporting a radio link
alarm until the next alarm detection start time is up.
Period for clearing a radio link warning. If a radio link warning is cleared within this period,
the BTS reports the recovery alarm for the warning. If a radio link warning is not cleared
within this period, the BTS determines whether to report a major radio link alarm
according to "WLAFLAG".
0~24 h 8
None GSM Working mode of the RXU board
E1, T1 None E1
30~300 s 90
60~300 s 90
Time when the BTS starts to check for a radio link alarm. If this time is up, the BTS starts to
check for and report a radio link alarm.
GSM_AND_UMTS, UMTS, GSM
BTS port working mode. This parameter must be consistent with that of the peer. Work mode of a BTS. A BTS can work in the
following modes:E1: The E1 system is recommended by the ITU-T. E1 carries signals at 2.048 Mbit/s.
G.703 defines the electrical specification and G.704 defines the frame format for E1
telecommunication lines. The E1 system is used in Europe and China.
T1: The T1 system is recommended by the ANSI and widely used in the North America.
T1 carries signals at 1.544 Mbit/s. If "DESTNODE" of the BTS is set to BSC,
BTS, or DXX, the setting of "WORKMODE" of the BTS port must be the same as that of the BSC interface board. The operator needn't set
"WORKMODE" of the BTS port, it is automatically set to the same value as that of
the BSC interface board. If "DESTNODE" of the BTS is set to OTHER, for example, TGW(Transmission Gateway),
"WORKMODE" of the BTS port must be set to E1(E1) or T1(T1), according to the physical
connection. The setting of the E1/T1 DIP switch of the
BTS must match the setting of "WORKMODE" of the BTS port.
Time for which the BTS waits to swap the OML after the OML is interrupted. With this parameter, the BTS does not swap the OML
when the OML is interrupted transiently.
Waiting time before establishing a link in the reverse direction after the transmission of a
